2013 Ram Cargo Van Owner's Manual
Upcoming SlideShare
Loading in...5
×
 

2013 Ram Cargo Van Owner's Manual

on

  • 6,033 views

2013 Ram Cargo Van Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

2013 Ram Cargo Van Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

Statistics

Views

Total Views
6,033
Views on SlideShare
6,033
Embed Views
0

Actions

Likes
0
Downloads
2
Comments
0

0 Embeds 0

No embeds

Accessibility

Categories

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

2013 Ram Cargo Van Owner's Manual 2013 Ram Cargo Van Owner's Manual Presentation Transcript

  • COVER IN 2013 RAM CARGO VAN 2013 RAM CV OWNER’S MANUAL C a r g o Va nChrysler Group LLC13MZZ-126-AB Second Edition Printed in U.S.A. 1207472cv1 13MZZ-126-AB Chrysler 1" gutter 06/13/2012 17:12:08 2013 RAM CARGO VAN 2013 RAM CV OWNER’S MANUAL C a r g o Va nChrysler Group LLC13MZZ-126-AB Second Edition Printed in U.S.A. COVER IN
  • VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of featuresChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the and equipment that are either standard or optional on thisname Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. vehicle. This manual may also include a description of featuresDRIVING AND ALCOHOL and equipment that are no longer available or were not orderedDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci- on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipmentdents. described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes inlevels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t design and specifications, and/or make additions to or im-drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a provements to its products without imposing any obligationfriend, or use public transportation. upon itself to install them on products previously manufac- tured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your per- ceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
  • SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 910 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 10
  • INTRODUCTION 1CONTENTSⅥ INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ⅵ VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . .6Ⅵ HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ⅵ VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6Ⅵ WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Ⅵ VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
  • 4 INTRODUCTIONINTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group nicians and genuine MOPAR௡ parts, and cares aboutLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision your satisfaction.workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - allessentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUALThis Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which sectiontance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on thecustomer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions andread these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manualassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of theshould be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughouting and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
  • INTRODUCTION 5 1
  • 6 INTRODUCTIONWARNINGS AND CAUTIONS Operating instructions for the special equipment in- stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer shouldThis Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructionsoperating procedures that could result in a collision or are missing, please contact your authorized dealer forbodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce- assistance in obtaining replacement documents from thedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you applicable manufacturer.do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may missimportant information. Observe all Warnings and Cau- For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:tions. www.dodgebodybuilder.com. This website contains di- mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. ItVAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technicalThe Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body support. For service issues, contact your authorizedmodifications or special equipment installed by van dealer.conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Referto the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERequipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on thestoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and left front corner of the instrument panel, visible throughservice on these items, contact the applicable manufac- the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicleturer.
  • INTRODUCTION 7frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor- VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONSmation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on yourvehicle, the vehicle registration and title. 1 WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Vehicle Identification NumberNOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECONTENTS 2Ⅵ A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Ⅵ ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .19 ▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Ⅵ REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .13 Ⅵ REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Ⅵ SENTRY KEY௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Ⅵ DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Ⅵ VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .17 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .35
  • 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEⅥ WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 ▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .66Ⅵ SLIDING SIDE DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert௡) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 ▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . .44 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .71 ▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . .48 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Ⅵ LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — ▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Ⅵ OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 ▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .75 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .64 ▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .79 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11Ⅵ COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES Ⅵ SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 (NO FACTORY INSTALLED REAR SEATS) — ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 ▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children In 2 Commercial Cargo Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Ⅵ ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .115 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
  • 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEA WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYSYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This systemconsists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) withintegral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob intothe ignition switch with either side up.Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly toan ignition switch. It has four operating positions, threewith detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detentpositions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.When released from the START position, the switch 1 — OFFautomatically returns to the ON/RUN position. 2 — ACCESSORY 3 — ON/RUN 4 — START
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13Key FobThe Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert thesquare end of the key fob into the ignition switch locatedon the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi- 2tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in therear of the Key Fob.The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicleshould the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmittergo dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lowerglove compartment. You can keep the emergency keywith you when valet parking. Emergency Key RemovalTo remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency keyat the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and into the lock cylinder with either side up.then pull the key out with your other hand. Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
  • 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Power window switches will also remain active WARNING! (Continued)for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has beenturned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended issetting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature. dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- WARNING! dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push in a location accessible to children, and do not ignition button to place ignition in OFF position. leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your ve- A child could operate power windows, other con- hicle. trols, or move the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with • Do not leave children or animals inside parked access to an unlocked vehicle. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEYா CAUTION! The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation 2 doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.Key-In-Ignition ReminderOpening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remoteignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignitiona chime will sound to remind you to remove the key. Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to theNOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Thethe Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition system will shut the engine off in two seconds if anposition. invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine. After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi- tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
  • 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEthe bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Replacement KeysKey Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to theresult in the engine being shut off after two seconds. vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate theIf the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, itvehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon CAUTION!as possible by an authorized dealer. Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and CAUTION! lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system is not compat- At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided ible with some after-market remote starting systems. with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is problems and loss of security protection. required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming abeen programmed to the vehicle electronics. blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17NOTE: When having the Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer sys- VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPEDtem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doorsauthorized dealer. for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-Customer Key Programming thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the 2 interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors andProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarmperformed at an authorized dealer. provides both audible and visible signals, for the firstGeneral Information three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lampsThe Sentry Key௡ system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Lightand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For ansubject to the following conditions: additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.• This device may not cause harmful interference. Rearming Of The System• This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause unde- The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 sired operation. additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
  • 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEpresent, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that To Disarm The Systemcondition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition. The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any ofTo Arm The System the following methods:Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: • Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to ЉStarting ProceduresЉ in ЉStarting And OperatingЉ for • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF further information). position. Insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position.•Make sure the vehicle ignition system is ЉOFFЉ and thekey is physically removed from the ignition. NOTE:2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button vehicle: on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch Vehicle Security Alarm.with the driver and/or passenger door open. • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will(RKE) transmitter. not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any3. If any doors are open, close them. door the alarm will sound.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior Tamper Alert power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm inThe Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your your absence, the horn will sound three times and thevehicle; however, you can create conditions where the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the 2system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.ously described arming sequences has occurred, the Security System Manual OverrideVehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whetheryou are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock theand open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, doors using the manual door lock plunger.disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPEDIf the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery The courtesy lights will turn on when you use thebecomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock theremain armed when the battery is reconnected; the doors or open any door.exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If thisoccurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- ther information.
  • 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. Theor they will immediately fade to off once the ignition RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at theswitch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position. vehicle to activate the system.NOTE: NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour- to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position). from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitters. dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle. (extreme bottom position). Vehicles built without the powered options will beREMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — equipped from the factory with three-button RKE trans-IF EQUIPPED mitters, and those built with power options will be equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors andliftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power Using The RKE Transmitterliftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN-door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) LOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 (optional). Some features can be programmed to the customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or sound horn on LOCK. 2 Key Fob With Three-Button RKE TransmitterSeven-button RKE transmitters will provide functionsthat allow the same basic operation as the three-button,but may also be used to operate the power liftgate Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter(optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature
  • 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLERemote Unlock Doors And Liftgate • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform-Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE ing the following steps:transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice tounlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on the 1. Perform this operation while standing outside theIlluminated Entry system. vehicle.Remote Key Unlock On First Press 2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmedThis feature lets you program the system to unlock either RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longerthe driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCKUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter: button while still holding the LOCK button.NOTE: 3. Release both buttons at the same time.• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In- 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- formation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans- Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- the Key Fob removed. ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/PersonalVehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- 2Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle mation.Security Alarm. • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform theRemote Lock Doors And Liftgate following steps:Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- 1. Perform this operation while standing outside theter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights vehicle.will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the 2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-signal. mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10Sound Horn With Remote Lock seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while stillThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors holding the LOCK button.are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be 3. Release both buttons at the same time.turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,proceed as follows:
  • 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the on and off, and the interior lights will turn on. ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless removed. you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h). its previous setting. NOTE:NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- • When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing theter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle PANIC button a second time, you may have to moveSecurity Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the noises of the system.UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle SecurityAlarm. • The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is running.Using The Panic Alarm Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If EquippedTo turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and holdthe PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmittersecond and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is beingclosed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position. power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open position.The power liftgate may also be opened and closed bypressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is 2console. armed, pressing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve-If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear hicle Security Alarm.pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch. Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If EquippedIf the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm isarmed, using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on thedoes not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/Alarm. Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is beingPower Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — power-closed, the door will reverse to the full openIf Equipped position.Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on theRKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
  • 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform thearmed, pressing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button following steps:twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve- 1. Perform this operation while standing outside thehicle Security Alarm. vehicle.Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — 2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmedIf Equipped RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longerThis feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCKthe doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- button while still holding the UNLOCK button.ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To changethe current setting, proceed as follows: 3. Release both buttons at the same time.• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec- 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans- tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed. “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the backter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle housing or the printed circuit board.Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanicalAlarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the 2 latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways withUNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security your thumb and then pull the key out with your otherAlarm. hand.Programming Additional TransmittersIf you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,contact your authorized dealer for details.Transmitter Battery ReplacementThe recommended replacement battery is one CR2032battery.NOTE:• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate Emergency Key Removal
  • 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal. Separating RKE Transmitter 3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 294. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED halves together. This system uses the Remote Keyless EntryGeneral Information (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and niently from outside the vehicle while still 2 maintaining security. The system has a range ofRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the approximately 300 ft (91 m).following conditions: NOTE:• This device may not cause harmful interference. • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic• This device must accept any interference received, in- transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- tion. • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range.If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normaldistance, check for these two conditions. How To Use Remote Start1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected All of the following conditions must be met before the life of the battery is approximately three years. engine will Remote Start:2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station • Shift lever in PARK tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. • Doors closed
  • 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Hood closed • System not disabled from previous remote start event• Liftgate closed • Vehicle theft alarm not active• Hazard switch off • Ignition in Off position• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) WARNING!• Ignition key removed from ignition switch • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or• Battery at an acceptable charge level confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-• RKE PANIC button not pressed oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in- jury or death when inhaled. • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle To Enter Remote Start ModeInformation Center (EVIC) — If Equipped Press and release the REMOTE START buttonThe following messages will display in the EVIC if the on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking 2turely: lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar cycle.• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low NOTE:• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar • If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start will automatically lock the doors.• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset • The park lights will turn on and remain on duringThe EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned Remote Start mode.to the ON/RUN position. • For security, power window and power sunroof op- eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
  • 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• The engine can be started two consecutive 15-minute NOTE: cycles with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position. in order to drive the vehicle.To Enter the Vehicle After Remote Start • The message “Remote Start Active — Key To Run” willTo enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a display in the EVIC until you insert and turn the key toRemote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the ON/RUN position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is mation Center (EVIC)” for further information.unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, insert the Key Fob Cancel Remote Startinto the ignition switch and turn it to the ON/RUNposition, otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following15-minute cycle. occur:To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle • The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpmBefore the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release • Any engine warning lights come onthe UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlockthe doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if • Low Fuel Light turns onequipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, • The hood is openedinsert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn theswitch to the ON/RUN position. • The hazard switch is pressed
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33• The shift lever is moved out of PARK When To Reset Remote Start• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of cycle two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was 2• The brake pedal is pressed initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start-To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start ing. After either of these conditions, or if the VehicleMode Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset insert thePress and release the REMOTE START button 1 time or Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch toallow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. the ON/RUN position.NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in theRemote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote DOOR LOCKSStart button to shut down the engine for 2 seconds after Manual Door Locksreceiving a valid Remote Start request. Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs on each door trim panel.
  • 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf the lock knob is down when you shut either front door,the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside thevehicle before closing the door. Sliding Door Lock WARNING! Manual Door Lock • For personal security and safety in the event of anIf the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive assliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are well as when you park and leave the vehicle.not inside the vehicle before closing the door. (Continued)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Power Door Locks — If Equipped WARNING! (Continued)• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with A power door lock switch is on each front door trim access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a 2 number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Driver Power Door Lock Switches A child could operate power windows, other con- trols, or move the vehicle.
  • 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf you press the power door lock switch while the KeyFob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, thepower locks will not operate. This prevents you fromaccidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removingthe Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks tooperate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in theignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder toremove the Key Fob. Front Passenger Power Door Switches 1 - Window Open/Close 2 - Power Door Locks
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will notdoor is open, the sliding door will lock. operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks (lock or unlock).Automatic Door Locks — If EquippedWhen enabled, the door locks will lock automatically On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Ve- 2 hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronicwhen the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settingsauto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandingauthorized dealer per written request of the customer. Your Instrument Panel” for further information.Please see your authorized dealer for service. NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mphUnlock Doors Automatically On Exit — (24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On ExitIf Equipped features in accordance with local laws.The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocksall of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. Thiswill occur only after the shift lever has been shifted intothe PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (theshift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doorsclosed).
  • 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWINDOWS Power WindowsPower Vent Windows — If Equipped You can control either the front or rear windows using switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. TheThe Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s switches will operate only when the ignition switch is indoor trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces-windows from the driver’s seat. sory delay. Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close Driver’s Power Window Switches
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain activefor up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has beenturned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delaysetting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature. 2Power Window Lockout Switch — If EquippedThe driver may lock out the rear power windows bydepressing the bar switch just below the power windowswitches. Power Window Lockout Switch Front Passenger Power Window Switch There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. The
  • 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEswitches will operate only when the ignition switch is in Auto-Down Feature — If Equippedthe ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces- The front window switches may be equipped with ansory delay. Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the window will go down automati- cally. To open the window part way, press the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop. The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature. Front Passenger Power Door Switches1 - Window Open/Close2 - Power Door Locks
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — • Any impact due to rough road conditions may triggerIf Equipped the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-The front driver and front passenger switches may be closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to theequipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window first detent and hold to close window manually. 2switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and thewindow will go up automatically. WARNING!To stop the window from going all the way up during the There is no anti-pinch protection when the windowAuto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects fromTo close the window part way, lift the window switch to the window path before closing.the first detent and release when you want the windowto stop. Auto Up Reset — If EquippedNOTE: To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored:• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again completely and continue to hold the switch up for an to close the window. additional two seconds after the window is closed.
  • 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch —If EquippedSecond row passengers may open and close the slidingdoor window by a single switch on the door handleassembly.The switches will operate only when the ignition switchis in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power Sliding Door Power Window Switchaccessory delay. NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has stopping several inches above the window sill.activated the Power Window Lockout.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43Wind Buffeting To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol- lowing guidelines:Wind buffeting can be described as the perception ofpressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the • Always open the door smoothly.ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the • Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open- 2windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain ing the door. This is very important when your vehicleopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster inrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are the downhill direction.open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rearwindows together to minimize the buffeting. If the • There is a hold-open latch that is activated when thebuffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun- sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep yourroof opening to minimize the buffeting. sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding door after the hold-open latch is activated, you mustSLIDING SIDE DOOR rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the exterior handle.The sliding door may be opened from the inside or theoutside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latchedsliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by anytime the vehicle is in motion.rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-wards opens the door and rocking forward releases thehold open latch in order to close the door.
  • 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within 5while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door iswhen the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fully open, pressing the button twice within 5 seconds afuel door. second time will close the door.Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped There are power sliding side door switches located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door The power sliding door may be opened or for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console closed manually or by using the buttons on the for the driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pressed rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside while the door is under a power cycle, the door willpower sliding door handle will also power open or close reverse direction.the power sliding door. NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlockedNOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a before the power sliding door switches will operate.second time while the sliding door is power opening orpower closing will allow the sliding door to be opened orclosed manually.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door master lock button, located in the overhead console, to disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen- 2 gers. NOTE: • The power sliding side door switches will not open the power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be Power Sliding Door Switch pressed.If the inside or outside door handles are used while the • If anything obstructs the power sliding side door whilepower sliding side door is activated, the power sliding it is closing or opening, the door will automaticallydoor feature will be canceled and will go into manual reverse to the closed or open position, provided itmode. meets sufficient resistance.
  • 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash close position, it will fully open when a power sliding The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will is fully open and then press the switch again. alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc- entering or exiting the vehicle. tions within the same cycle, the system will automati- The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a disabled by performing the following procedure: clicking sound until the door has no further move- ment. This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling 1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch. the inside or outside handle. If this condition occurs, 2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five no damage is done to the power sliding door motor. times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start The power sliding door must be opened or closed the engine). manually. 3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZARD WARNING! switch ON. You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path 4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear successfully completed the programming. before closing the door.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47You can turn the feature back on by repeating theprevious procedure.Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock SwitchTo provide a safer environment for small children riding 2in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switchesand handles may be overridden by pressing the OFF sideof the Master Lock Out Switch located in the frontoverhead console.When the power sliding door master lock switch is in theOFF position, the power sliding side door may not beopened or closed by pressing the switch located on the Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switchb-pillar trim panel, just in front of the sliding door oractivating the inside power sliding door handle. 1 — Left Sliding Door 3 — Right Sliding Door 2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock
  • 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESliding Side Door Child Protection LockTo provide a safer environment for small children ridingin the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with aChild Protection Door Lock system.NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system isengaged, the door can be opened only by using theoutside door handle even though the inside door lock isin the unlocked position.To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock1. Open the sliding side door. Child Protection Door Lock2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. (toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock. NOTE: • After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en- WARNING! gaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position) the door can be opened only by using the Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened 2 on the overhead console or the switches located on the from the outside door handle or the switches located trim panel just in front of the power sliding door. on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding• The power sliding side door will operate from the door when the Child Protection Door Locks are switches located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in front engaged. of the power sliding door, regardless of the Child To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid unin- tentional operation of the power sliding door from 1. Open the sliding side door. the rear seats, press the “OFF” Master Lock Out 2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward Switch located in the front overhead console, next to (away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Pro- the driver. tection Door Lock. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if equipped).
  • 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: To open the liftgate, press the liftgate release handle• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system, located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull always test the door from the inside to make certain it the liftgate open with one fluid motion. is in the desired position.• The power sliding side door switches will not open the power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).• The power sliding door will operate from the outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the overhead console, or the switches located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door when the shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the child lock lever position.LIFTGATE Liftgate Handle LocationOn vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate canbe unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter button, or by activating the power door lockswitches located on the front doors.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51Power Liftgate — If EquippedThe power liftgate may be opened manually or by usingthe button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-ter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five 2seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate isfully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,a second time, will close the liftgate.The power liftgate may also be opened and closed bypressing the button located on the overhead console. Overhead Console Master Power Switch 1 — Left Sliding Door 3 — Right Sliding Door 2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock
  • 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button, When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and thelocated in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flashPushing once will only close the liftgate. This button and several audible beeps will occur to signal that thecannot be used to open the liftgate. liftgate is opening or closing. WARNING! During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away. NOTE: • If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it Rear Power Liftgate Switch meets sufficient resistance.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the • The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open (0 km/h). position. 2 • The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures• During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open below −12°F (−24°C) or temperatures above 143°F or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several (62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice times indicating power operation is in progress. from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate buttons.• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must within the same cycle, the system will automatically be opened or closed manually. stop and must be opened or closed manually.• If the liftgate release button is activated while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
  • 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS WARNING! Some of the most important safety features in your • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous vehicle are the restraint systems: exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating posi- the liftgate closed when you are operating the tions vehicle. • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the • Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located climate control blower switch is set at high speed. on top of the front seats (integrated into the head Do not use the recirculation mode. restraint) — if equippedGas props support the liftgate in the open position. • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air BagHowever, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when that span the front, second, and third row seating foropening the liftgate in cold weather. the driver and passengers seated next to a window
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as wheel possible. 2• Knee bolster for front passenger seat occupant If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether enhance occupant protection by managing occupant for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold energy during an impact event infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and third row CHildren (LATCH). center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or rates of inflation based on several factors, including the secure a large item in a seat severity and type of collision.
  • 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEHere are some simple steps you can take to minimize the children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or underrisk of harm from a deploying air bag: their arm.1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child buckled up in a rear seat. seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. WARNING! (Refer to “Child Restraints”) Infants in rear facing child restraints should never You should read the instructions provided with your ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi- shoulder belts properly. tion. 3. The driver and front passenger seats should beChildren that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat moved back as far as practical to allow the Advancedbelt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be Front Air Bags room to inflate.secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If yourpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, thechild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should side air bags will inflate forcefully into the spaceride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow between you and the door.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 575. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be WARNING! (Continued) modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain under ؆If You Need Assistance؆. (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or 2 WARNING! window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. vehicle are buckled up properly. • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted could cause serious injury, including death. Air Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably you to be severely injured or killed. extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. (Continued)
  • 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEBuckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking theon short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.and cause a collision that includes you. This can happenfar away from home or on your own street. WARNING!Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside orcan reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding inof the worst injuries happen when people are thrown these areas are more likely to be seriously injuredfrom the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of or killed.ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the • Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourinside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbe belted at all times. belts.Lap/Shoulder Belts • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seatbelts. belts are designed to go around the large bones ofThe belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock your body. These are the strongest parts of yourduring very sudden stops or collisions. This feature body and can take the forces of a collision the best.allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely withyou under normal conditions. However, in a collision the (Continued)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the WARNING! (Continued) front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the your injuries in a collision much worse. You might latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out 2 the belt to go around your lap. of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate
  • 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch WARNING! plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter- nal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a colli- sion.• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING! • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride 2 too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop- erly. In a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your Removing Slack From Belt abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
  • 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not possible and keep it snug. disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assem- • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a blies must be replaced after a collision if they have collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi- Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions ately and have it fixed. The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat. comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac- tor will withdraw any slack in the belt. Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is anchorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttonscomfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt while simultaneously pushing down on the anchorageis long enough to fit , insert the large latch plate into the assembly.buckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should 2withdraw any slack in the belt.To release the small latch plate, position the end of thelarge latch plate against the red button on the small latchplate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into theheadliner.Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageIn the front seats and the second row outboard seats, theshoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward ordownward to help position the belt away from yourneck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by Adjustable Anchoragepushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the
  • 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAs a guide, if you are shorter than average you will Driver Center Passengerprefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average First Row N/A N/A ALRyou will prefer a higher position. When you release theanchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that Second Row ALR N/A ALRit is locked in position. Third Row ALR Cinch ALRSeat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions • N/A — Not ApplicableThe seat belts in the passenger seating positions are • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractorequipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or If the passenger seating position is equipped with ana cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child ALR and is being used for normal usage:restraint system. For additional information refer to“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortablyunder the “Child Restraint” section. The chart below wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to notdefines the type of feature for each seating position. activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a Љclick.Љ
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — How To Disengage The Automatic Locking ModeIf Equipped Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow itIn this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. to retract completely to disengage the Automatic LockingThe belt will still retract to remove any slack in the Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) 2shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available locking mode.on all passenger-seating positions with a combinationlap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode any- WARNING!time a child safety seat is installed in a seating positionthat has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced ifand under should always be properly restrained in the the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractorrear seat. (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to theHow To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode procedures in the Service Manual.1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until could increase the risk of injury in collisions. the entire belt is extracted.3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
  • 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEEnergy Management Feature NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must beThis vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy worn snugly and positioned properly.Management feature in the front seating positions to helpfurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-collision. straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner orThis safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. Thisfeature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)the occupant’s chest. These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-Seat Belt Pretensioners nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readilyThe seat belts for both front seating positions are identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be splitremove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. in two halves, with the front half being soft foam andThese devices may improve the performance of the seat trim, the back half being decorative plastic.belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Workearly in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determinespants, including those in child restraints. whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rearimpact requires deployment, both the driver and frontpassenger seat AHRs will be deployed.When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half 2of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gapbetween the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.This system is designed to help prevent or reduce theextent of injuries to the driver and front passenger incertain types of rear impacts.NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or maynot deploy in the event of a front or side impact.However if during a front impact, a secondary rear Active Head Restraint (AHR) Componentsimpact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever- 1 — Head Restraint Front Half 3 — Head Restraint Back Halfity and type of the impact. (Soft Foam and Trim) (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) 2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
  • 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat. CAUTION! All occupants, including the driver, should not oper- ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting andpositioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting ActiveHead Restraints” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle”.Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR) Hand Positioning Points On AHRIf the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR atyou must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and a comfortable position.front passenger seat. You can recognize when the ActiveHead Restraint has been triggered by the fact that theyhave moved forward (as shown in step three of theresetting procedure).
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 693. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism. 2 3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism1 — Downward Movement2 — Rearward Movement
  • 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints into the back decorative plastic half. checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlertா) BeltAlert௡ is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger (if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert௡) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened. The BeltAlert௡ warning sequence begins after the vehicle AHR In Reset Position speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat BeltNOTE: Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer. duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts NOTE: Although BeltAlert௡ has been deactivated, theare fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminatepants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped withunbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph BeltAlert௡) seat belt remains unfastened. 2(8 km/h), BeltAlert௡ will provide both audio and visual Seat Belts And Pregnant Womennotification. We recommend that pregnant women use the seat beltsThe front passenger seat BeltAlert௡ is not active when the throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe isfront passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert௡ may be the best way to keep the baby safe.triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the frontpassenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the beltequipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are Keep the belt low so that it does not come across thesecured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.BeltAlert௡ can be enabled or disabled by your authorizeddealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac-tivating BeltAlert௡.
  • 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESeat Belt Extender Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air BagsIf a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both thewhen the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seatequipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airdealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. Theextender should be used only if the existing belt is not passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in thelong enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- instrument panel, above the glove compartment. Thetender and store it. words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental WARNING! Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags. The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator 2 design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front1 — Driver And Passenger 2 — Knee Bolster passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whetherAdvanced Front Air Bags the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The3 — Supplemental Driver Side seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of theKnee Air Bag Advanced Front Air Bags.
  • 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThis vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Air Bag System ComponentsInflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bagand rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC system components:air bags are located above the side windows and theircovers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- • Air Bag Warning LightMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced • Steering Wheel and Columnprotection for an occupant during a side impact. The • Instrument PanelSABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats. • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air BagNOTE: • Knee Impact Bolster• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag authorized dealer immediately. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75• Front and Side Impact Sensors WARNING!• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects 2Advanced Front Air Bag Features could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collisionThe Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides • Do not put anything on or around the air bag coversoutput appropriate to the severity and type of collision as or attempt to open them manually. You may damagedetermined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), the air bags and you could be injured because the airwhich may receive information from the front impact bags may no longer be functional. The protectivesensors. covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster inimpact that requires air bag deployment. This low output any way.is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolsterused for more severe collisions. such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
  • 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between theSupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the leftprovide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right airduring a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air baglabel sewn into the outboard side of the front seats bag only.“ONLY”. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll- over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy down- ward, covering both windows on the impact side. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77NOTE: WARNING!• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right vehicle may deploy. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain 2 (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, high enough to block the location of the SABIC. but they will open during air bag deployment. The area where the SABIC is located should remain• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during free from any obstructions. deployment could cause you to be severely injured or • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects killed. between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could beThe system includes side impact sensors that are cali- pushed into you, causing serious injury.brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts thatrequire air bag occupant protection. (Continued)
  • 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Always sit upright as possible with your back against the WARNING! (Continued) seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appro- • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do priate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat not have any accessory items installed which will recommended for the size and weight of the child. alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma- Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the enhanced protection and works together with the Driver vehicle for any reason. Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact. • Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body outside of the window. Knee Impact Bolster The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of theSAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt front passenger, and position the front occupant for therestraint system. Occupants, including children who are best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Frontseriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil- Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Kneedren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to providewindows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags improved protection for the driver and front passenger.inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) or rollover collisions.The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety systemrequired for this vehicle. The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver 2 Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or including some that may produce substantial vehicleside air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. damage — for example, some pole collisions, truckBased on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the otherORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air hand, depending on the type and location of impact,bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes withfront seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severeseveral factors, including the severity and type of impact. initial deceleration.Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec- Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity andtion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal type of collision.collisions depending on several factors, including the
  • 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEBecause air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warningover time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are Light in the instrument panel for approxi-not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should mately four to eight seconds for a self-checkhave deployed. when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If theSeat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, itsions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarilyaway from an inflating air bag. or continuously. A single chime will sound if the lightThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction isposition, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. tics also record the nature of the malfunction.The ORC contains a backup power supply system thatmay deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power orit becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 are possible, based on several factors, including the WARNING! collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to 2 to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. air bag system immediately. The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through theDriver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the airInflator Units bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag InflatorInflator Units are located in the center of the steering Unitwheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit isWhen the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steeringvanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring thequantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units.Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
  • 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEthe Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate in aboutcover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very highbag to inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in speed and with such a high force that it could injure you ifabout 15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in theSide Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes area where the side air bag inflates. This especially appliesin the side of the air bag. to children.Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable CurtainInflator Units (SABIC) Inflator UnitsThe Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to adesigned to activate only in certain side collisions. particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severityThe ORC determines if a side collision requires the side and type of collision. In these events, the ORC willair bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.collision. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the sideBased on the severity and type of collision, the side air bag curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushesinflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, the outside edge of the headliner out of the way andreleasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 mil-exits through the seat seam into the space between the liseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you Enhanced Accident Response Systemare not belted and seated properly, or if items are In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, ifpositioned in the area where the side curtain air bag the communication network remains intact, and theinflates. This especially applies to children. The side power remains intact, depending on the nature of the 2curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when event the ORC will determine whether to have theit is inflated. Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, ing functions:vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of Cut off fuel to the engine.whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power orNOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and until the ignition key is turned off.SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle. Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as theFront And Side Impact Sensors battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the Unlock the doors automatically.ORC in determining appropriate response to impactevents. In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
  • 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf A Deployment Occurs • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-likeThe Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate particles. The particles are a normal by-product of theimmediately after deployment. process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate theNOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eyecollisions. This does not mean something is wrong with irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose orthe air bag system. throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritationIf you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle onor all of the following may occur: your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause structions for cleaning. abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those bags will not be in place to protect you. you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING!Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can not WARNING!protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, 2seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac- • Modifications to any part of the air bag systemtor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im- could cause it to fail when you need it. You couldmediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con- be injured if the air bag system is not there totroller (ORC) system serviced as well. protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued)
  • 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Air Bag Warning Light WARNING! (Continued)• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag You will want to have the air bags ready to system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may inflate for your protection in a collision. The not function properly if modifications are made. Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any circuits and interconnecting wiring associated air bag system service. If your seat, including your with air bag system electrical components. While the air trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of way (including removal or loosening/tightening of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your the air bag system immediately. authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on for seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to approximately four to eight seconds when the ignition modify the air bag system for persons with dis- switch is first turned to ON/RUN. abilities, contact your authorized dealer. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the approximate four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety beltsController (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may were buckled/fastened;not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly 2check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing thelocated on the inside of the fuse block cover for the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the • How fast the vehicle was traveling.fuse is good. These data can help provide a better understanding ofEvent Data Recorder (EDR) the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded bycertain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type ofvehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of personally identifying data routinely acquired during atime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle crash investigation.is designed to record such data as:
  • 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is Children 12 years or younger should ride properlyrequired, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crashIn addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, statistics, children are safer when properly restrained insuch as law enforcement, that have the special equip- the rear seats rather than in the front.ment, can read the information if they have access to the There are different sizes and types of restraints forvehicle or the EDR. children from newborn size to the child almost largeChild Restraints enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correctEveryone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all seat for your child.times, including babies and children. Every state in theUnited States, and every Canadian province, requires Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it hasthat small children ride in proper restraint systems. This a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safetyis the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89NOTE: For additional information, refer towww.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’swebsite for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ 2eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
  • 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESummary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child RestraintInfants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible and who have not reached the height or Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear weight limits of their child restraint seat of the vehicleSmall Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a who have out-grown the height or weight five-point Harness, facing forward in the limit of their rear-facing child restraint rear seat of the vehicleLarger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle forward-facing child restraint, but are too seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat beltChildren Too Large for Children 12 years old or younger, who Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat ofChild Restraints have out-grown the height or weight limit the vehicle of their booster seat
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91Infants And Child Restraints old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by theirSafety experts recommend that children ride rearward- convertible child seat.facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or untilthey reach either the height or weight limit of their rear 2facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can WARNING!be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of anchild seats. air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a childThe infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearwardvehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until facing infant seat.they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rearConvertible child seats can be used either rearward- seat.facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible childseats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward- Older Children And Child Restraintsfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be Children who are two years old or who have outgrownused rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
  • 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEconvertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc- WARNING!tion are for children who are over two years old or whohave outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infanttheir rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for The child could be badly injured or killed. Followas long as possible, up to the highest weight or height the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactlyallowed by the child seat. when installing an infant or child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it inAll children whose weight or height is above the the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose inbelt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it couldfit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause seriousthe vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against personal injury.the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning boosterseat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held Children Too Large For Booster Seatsin the vehicle by the seat belt. Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then thesimple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If thevehicle’s seat belt alone: child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the 2 the vehicle seat? belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back. way back?3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
  • 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLERecommendations For Attaching Child RestraintsRestraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below Weight of the LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only + Top Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- 2 equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
  • 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLELATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle Second Row Bench Second Row Captains Chairs Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating positionposition Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until theweight of the child restraint) for using the combined weight of the child and the childLATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat beltrestraint? and tether anchor instead of the LATCH 2 system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use thebelt be used together to attach a rear-facing LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-or forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.Can a child seat be installed in the center N/Aposition using the inner LATCH lower an-chorages?
  • 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECan two child restraints be attached using a No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage withcommon lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes The child seat may touch the back of theback of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.Can the head restraints be removed? Yes; second row outboard positions only, third row all positions.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when 2 you lean into the rear seat to install the childrestraint. You will easily feel them if you run your fingeralong the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
  • 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLELATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown) LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)Locating The LATCH Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. In addition, there are tether strap anchors lo- Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower cated behind each rear seatback, near to the anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the floor. anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a Center Seat LATCHtether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end If a child restraint installed in the center position blocksto attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the 2Center Seat LATCH – Commercial Cargo Vehicles center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or(No Factory Installed Rear Seats) — If Equipped seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position. WARNING! WARNING! This vehicle does not have a center seating position. Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more install a child seat in the center of the back seat. than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” forAlways follow the directions of the child restraint manu- typical installation instructions.facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all childrestraint systems will be installed as described here. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu- facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
  • 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto- ing position. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- position has. tions to attach a tether anchor.2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint tether strap of the child seat so that you can more rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- anchorages. turer’s instructions.3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by that seating position. For some second row seats, you pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) restraint to get a better fit. in any direction.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt WARNING!When using the LATCH attaching system to install achild restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being Improper installation of a child restraint to theused by other occupants or being used to secure child LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- 2restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directionsinstalling a child restraint using the LATCH system, exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out ofthe child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes withthe child restraint installation, instead of buckling itbehind the child restraint, route the seat belt through thechild restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lockthe seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that theseat belts are not toys and that they should not play withthem.
  • 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEInstalling Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR willBelt make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,The seat belts in the passenger seating positions areequipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un- der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate isRetractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Bothtypes of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through athe seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it isnot necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below andbe “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts.webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle 2 Second Row Bench Second Row Captains Chair
  • 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWhat is the weight limit (child’s weight + Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when usingweight of the child restraint) for using the Child Restraint the seat belt to install a forward facing childTether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a restraint, up to the recommended weightforward facing child restraint? limit of the child restraint.Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes Contact between the front passenger seatback of the front passenger seat? and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.Can the head restraints be removed? Yes; second row outboard positions only, third row all positions.Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten Yes In positions with cinching latch platesthe seat belt against the belt path of the child (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twistedrestraint? up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part ofAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you 2 position. For some second row seats, you may need to will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a now in the Automatic Locking mode. better fit. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor locked, you should not be able to pull out any web- to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a lap portion around the child restraint while you push “click.” the child restraint rearward and downward into the4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight vehicle seat. against the child seat.
  • 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil- For some second row seats, you may need to recline the dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. attach a tether anchor. 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) path. in any direction. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear aAny seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the “click.”belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1095. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the the latch plate into the buckle with the release button seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil- restraint. 2 dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the attach a tether anchor. buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) restraint installation tight, try a different seating position. in any direction. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top TetherAny seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the Anchorage — Second Row Captains Chairsbelt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan toIf the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have You may need to move the seat forward to providetrouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon- better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no topnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short tether anchorage for that seating position (see thebuckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert charts above), move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
  • 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second Row Anchorage Shown)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 WARNING! • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly 2 behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown) Transporting Pets4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. restraint manufacturer’s instructions. An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
  • 112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECOMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES (NO FACTORYINSTALLED REAR SEATS) — IF EQUIPPEDCommercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as afamily vehicle and are not intended for carrying childrenin the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry achild in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seatshould be moved to the full rearward position and thechild must be in a proper restraint system based on itsage, size and weight. WARNING! NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor a vehicle without rear seats. In a collision, serious This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether injury or death may occur from the deploying pas- anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger senger airbag. seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forward- facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether strap.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113 • A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be WARNING! used for children who are too heavy for a rearward- Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se- facing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE IN- 2 passenger airbag. In a collision, a passenger airbag STALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A COMMER- may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants CIAL CARGO VEHICLE. When a convertible seat is riding in rearward-facing infant restraints. properly installed facing forward, the vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most position.Restraining Infants And Small Children InCommercial Cargo Vehicles • Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt-There are different sizes and types of restraints for positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to thechildren from newborn size to the child almost large rear most position. Older children who do not useenough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats shouldcorrect for your child: ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the• The forward-facing child seat is for children from seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never allow about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or old. under their arm.
  • 114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETether Installation For Commercial Cargo Vehicles 5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the tighten the child restraint tether strap.vehicle, follow the instructions shown: 6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other rear of the front passenger seat. condition that might affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your autho-2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions rized dealership for a replacement part. for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the extended tether strap. WARNING!3. Route the tether strap under the head rest. The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with aNOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is child restraint only. It should not be used for any othercentered between the headrest supports underneath the purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor strap forhead rest. nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose threads. If these or any other condition that might affect the4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether performance of the strap is observed, DO NOT USE strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal that strap. Personal injury may result. Contact your anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat. authorized dealer for a replacement part.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS CAUTION!A long break-in period is not required for the engine anddrivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. 2Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in andWhile cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- SAFETY TIPSmental and should be avoided. Transporting PassengersThe engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is ahigh-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGOshould be consistent with anticipated climate conditions AREA.under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
  • 116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked WARNING! vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon cause serious injury or death. monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, Breathing it can make you unconscious and can inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously follow these safety tips: injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat confined areas any longer than needed to move belts. your vehicle in or out of the area. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate using a seat belt properly. open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The WARNING! (Continued) Vehicle • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, 2 blower at high speed. frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after asystem. collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding beltsystem, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the or retractor condition, replace the belt.vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle isdamaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Lightplete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, The light should come on and remain on fordamaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open four to eight seconds as a bulb check when theseams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light isto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, not lit during starting, see your authorizedinspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raisedfor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
  • 118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEdealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while WARNING!driving, have the system checked by an authorizeddealer. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-Defroster sonal injury.Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place • Always make sure that floor mats are properlythe blower control on high speed. You should be able to attached to the floor mat fasteners.feel the air directed against the windshield. See your • Never place or install floor mats or other floorauthorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properlyable. secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-Floor Mat Safety Information ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on topvehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area of already installed floor mats. Additional floorunobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they mats and other coverings will reduce the size of thecannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals pedal area and interfere with the pedals.or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. (Continued)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside WARNING! (Continued) The Vehicle• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have Tires been removed for cleaning. Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear 2• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts can become trapped under the brake pedal and and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires• If required, mounting posts must be properly in- (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. stalled, if not equipped from the factory.Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or Lightsmounting can cause interference with the brake Have someone observe the operation of brake lights andpedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turncontrol of the vehicle. signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
  • 120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEDoor LatchesCheck for positive closing, latching, and locking.Fluid LeaksCheck area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasolinefumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, orbrake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should belocated and corrected immediately.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECONTENTSⅥ MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With 3 Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .128 ▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .132 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .129 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .133 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Ⅵ BLIND SPOT MONITORING — ▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 ▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .130 ▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 ▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Ⅵ Uconnect௡ Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .142 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
  • 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ▫ Uconnect௡ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 ▫ Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . .185 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .159 ▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . .186 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Uconnect௡ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 ▫ Stow ’n Go௡ Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . .191 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ Quad Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198Ⅵ VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .172 ▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .202 ▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped. . . . .203 ▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ Third Row Power Folding Seat — ▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Ⅵ SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 ▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks. . . . . . . . .209 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .182
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123Ⅵ DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .209 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .219 ▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE ▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 ▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Memory Seat ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 3 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Ⅵ TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .214 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Ⅵ LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 ▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .217 Ⅵ WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . .223 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .217 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .217 ▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 ▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .218 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
  • 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Ⅵ PARKSENSE௡ REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .225 ▫ ParkSense௡ Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Ⅵ TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .227 ▫ ParkSense௡ Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Ⅵ HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ ParkSense௡ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Ⅵ ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .229 ▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense௡ . . . . . . . . . . .239Ⅵ ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — ▫ Service The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense௡ System . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 ▫ ParkSense௡ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .240 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Ⅵ PARKVIEW௡ REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 ▫ Turning ParkView௡ On Or Off — With ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .245 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 ▫ Turning ParkView௡ On Or Off — Without ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .255 Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .245 ▫ Using HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257Ⅵ OVERHEAD CONSOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Front Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 ▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 3 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 ▫ Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) . . . . . . .247 Ⅵ POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .260 ▫ Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped. . .249 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 ▫ Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped . . . . .249 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .261Ⅵ GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .250 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink௡. . .252 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .261 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button . . .255 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
  • 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Ⅵ STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 ▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . . .275Ⅵ ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — ▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped . . .276Ⅵ POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . .268 ▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Ⅵ CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 ▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 ▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 ▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 ▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Ⅵ CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped . . .271 ▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 ▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .282 ▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . .273 ▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .285
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127Ⅵ RAM CARGO VAN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Ⅵ ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .291 ▫ Ram Cargo Van Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 ▫ Deploying the Crossbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292Ⅵ REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Ⅵ SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .297 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 3Ⅵ LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .291
  • 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEMIRRORSInside Day/Night Mirror — If EquippedA two-point pivot system allows for horizontal andvertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror tocenter on the view through the rear window.Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the smallcontrol under the mirror to the night position (toward therear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted whileset in the day position (toward the windshield). Manual Rearview Mirror
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129Automatic Dimming Mirror — If EquippedThis mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glarefrom vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on oroff by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A lightto the left of the button will illuminate to indicate whenthe dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right 3of the button does not illuminate.NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle ismoving in reverse. Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
  • 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOutside Mirrors Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) If Equippedto center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust foroverlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto- WARNING! matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts. Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they Outside Mirrors Folding Feature really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either could cause you to collide with another vehicle or forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have other object. Use your inside mirror when judging three detent positions: the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. • full forward • full rearward and • normal.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131Power Mirrors — If Equipped The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust adoor trim panel. mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you want to adjust. NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. 3 Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Power Mirror Controls
  • 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEHeated Mirrors — If Equipped NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec- feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- Programmable Features” in “Understanding Yourther information. Instrument Panel” for further information.Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Power Folding Mirrors — If EquippedSeat Only) — If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is locatedTilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrorswill move slightly downward from the present position to the normal driving position.when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’soutside mirror will then return to the original position NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mphwhen the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position. (16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicleMirrors in Reverse position. speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will automatically unfold.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPEDAn illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, tothe mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati- detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights. motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. 3 Illuminated Mirror Rear Detection Zones
  • 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhen the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will NOTE:momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver aboutto let the driver know that the system is operational. The rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any tection zones.forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change ifwhen the vehicle is in PARK. your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visuallyThe BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicleon both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer orstarts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap- other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extendsproximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in thesystem monitors the detection zones on both sides of the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entirevehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately time the vehicle is in a forward gear.6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors arevehicles in these areas. located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum- per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 3 Sensor Locations BSM Warning LightThe BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the The BSM system monitors the detection zone from threedetection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving tolocated in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue anaudible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. alert during these types of zone entries.Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
  • 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEEntering From The Side Entering From The RearVehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on eitherside of the vehicle. side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137Overtaking TrafficIf you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed ofless than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in theblind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning lightwill be illuminated. If the difference in speed between thetwo vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warninglight will not illuminate. 3 Overtaking/Passing Overtaking/Approaching
  • 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that arestationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle inberms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.on such objects. This is normal operation and yourvehicle does not require service. Opposing Traffic Stationary Objects
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING! The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy- clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped 3 with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.Rear Cross PathThe Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the RCP Detection Zonesdriver when backing out of parking spaces where their RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides ofvision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side ofslowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 torear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will 2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi-then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as inoncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. parking lot situations.
  • 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operationbe obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Three selectable modes of operation are available in thesensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer tosystem will not be able to alert the driver. “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/PersonalWhen RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-driver is alerted using both the visual and audible standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.alarms, including reducing the radio volume. Blind Spot Alert WARNING! When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be view mirror based on a detected object. However, when used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when with both visual and audible alerts when a detected backing up, even when using RCP. Always check object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be the radio is muted. sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Fail- ure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object isWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radiothe BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; thepriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the RCP state always requests the chime.turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to analert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Off 3will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visualtected object are present on the same side at the same or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operatingaddition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehiclemuted. is started the previously stored mode will be recalled andNOTE: used.• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable system, the radio is also muted. When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will the appropriate visual alert only. display the message “ Blind spot system unavailable- Astronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
  • 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUconnectா Phone — IF EQUIPPED Uconnect௡ Phone allows you to transfer calls between theUconnect௡ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit yourvehicle communications system. Uconnect௡ Phone allows vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphoneyou to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using for private conversation.simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ “Work” orThe Uconnect௡ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth௡“Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s audio is “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect௡ featurestransmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the sys- Bluetooth௡ technology - the global standard that enablestem will automatically mute your radio when using the different electronic devices to connect to each other withoutUconnect௡ Phone. wires or a docking station, so Uconnect௡ Phone works noNOTE: The Uconnect௡ Phone requires a mobile phone matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it yourequipped with the Bluetooth௡ “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver- purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turnedsion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect௡ website for sup- on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect௡ Phone.ported phones. The Uconnect௡ Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobileFor Uconnect௡ customer support, visit phone can be used with the system at a time. The system iswww.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400. available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Voice Command Button WARNING! Actual button location may vary with the radio. Any voice commanded system should be used only The individual buttons are described in the in safe driving conditions following all applicable “Operation” section. laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at- tention should be focused on safely operating the The Uconnect௡ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free 3 vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision Profile certified Bluetooth௡ mobile phone. See the causing serious injury or death. Uconnect௡ website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer forUconnect௡ Phone Button details. The radio or steering wheel controls (if The Uconnect௡ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- equipped) will contain the two control buttons cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect௡ Phone (Uconnect௡ Phone button and Voice Com- can be adjusted either from the radio volume control mand button) that will enable you to knob or from the steering wheel radio control (rightaccess the system. When you press the button you will switch), if so equipped.hear the word Uconnect௡ followed by a BEEP. The beep The radio display will be used for visual prompts fromis your signal to give a command. the Uconnect௡ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on certain radios.
  • 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOperation part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound form voice com-Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect௡ mand “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break thePhone and to navigate through the Uconnect௡ Phone compound form command into two voice commands:menu structure. Voice commands are required after most “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, theUconnect௡ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a Uconnect௡ Phone works best when you talk in aspecific command and then guided through the available normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someoneoptions. sitting a few feet/meters away from you.• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the Voice Command Tree beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another prompt. Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.• For certain operations, compound commands can be Help Command used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to “Pair a Device”, the following compound command know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth௡ Device”. the beep. The Uconnect௡ Phone will play some of the• For each feature explanation in this section, only the options at any prompt if you ask for help. compound form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145To activate the Uconnect௡ Phone, simply press the The following are general phone to Uconnect௡ Phone button and follow the audible prompts for directions. pairing instructions:Uconnect௡ Phone sessions begin with a press of the • Press the button to begin. button on the radio control head. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayCancel Command “Device Pairing”. 3At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” andyou will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”few instances the system will take you back to the and follow the audible prompts.previous menu. • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-Pair (Link) Uconnect௡ Phone To A Mobile Phone fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone. You can enter anyTo begin using your Uconnect௡ Phone, you must pair four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PINyour compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone. after the initial pairing process.To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference • For identification purposes, you will be prompted toyour mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect௡ web- give the Uconnect௡ Phone a name for your mobilesite may also provide detailed instructions for pairing. phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name.
  • 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a • The system will prompt you to say the number you priority level between one and seven, with one being want to call. the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile • For example, you can say “234-567-8901”. phones to your Uconnect௡ Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, • The Uconnect௡ Phone will confirm the phone number connected to your Uconnect௡ System. The priority and then dial. The number will appear in the display allows the Uconnect௡ Phone to know which mobile of certain radios. phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the Call By Saying A Name vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the • Press the button to begin. Uconnect௡ Phone will use the priority three mobile • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone when you make a call. You can select to use a “Call”. lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section). • The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call.Dial By Saying A Number • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say• Press the button to begin. the name of the person you want to call. For example,• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ- “Dial”. ously stored name entry in the Uconnect௡ phonebook
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will Uconnect௡ Phonebook”, in the phonebook. allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone- book entry, if desired.• The Uconnect௡ system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may • When prompted, recite the phone number for the appear in the display of certain radios. phonebook entry that you are adding. 3Add Names To Your Uconnect௡ Phonebook After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- book, you will be given the opportunity to add moreNOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect௡ Phonebook is phone numbers to the current entry or to return to therecommended when the vehicle is not in motion. main menu.• Press the button to begin. The Uconnect௡ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to “Phonebook New Entry”. four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of only in that language. In addition, if equipped and long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- supported by your phone, Uconnect௡ Phone automati- mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook. instead of “Bob”.
  • 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPhonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-Transfer From Mobile Phone loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect௡ Phone.If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,Uconnect௡ Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s loaded, there may be a short delay before the latestphonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect௡ able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-website for supported phones. able for use.• To call a name from the Uconnect௡ Phonebook or • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call phone is accessible. by Saying a Name” section. • Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded. as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or made to the Uconnect௡ Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle. deleted on the Uconnect௡ Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- ferred and updated to Uconnect௡ Phone on the next phone connection.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149Edit Uconnect௡ Phonebook Entries After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry inNOTE: the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu. when the vehicle is not in motion. “Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be phone number to a name entry that already exists in the 3 deleted or edited. phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add “John• Press the button to begin. Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Entry” feature. “Phonebook Edit Entry”. Delete Uconnect௡ Phonebook Entry• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended entry that you wish to edit. when the vehicle is not in motion.• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, • Press the button to begin. mobile, or other) that you wish to edit. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the “Phonebook Delete”. phonebook entry that you are editing.
  • 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect௡ Phonebook Entries then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish • Press the button to begin. to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook “Phonebook Erase All”. from which you choose. To select one of the entries • The Uconnect௡ Phone will ask you to verify that you from the list, press the button while the wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. Uconnect௡ Phone is playing the desired entry and say “Delete”. • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.• After you enter the name, the Uconnect௡ Phone will • Note that only the phonebook in the current language ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, is deleted. work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be wish to delete. deleted or edited.• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current List All Names In The Uconnect௡ Phonebook language is deleted. • Press the button to begin.• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say deleted or edited. “Phonebook List Names”.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151• The Uconnect௡ Phone will play the names of all the accessed through the Uconnect௡ Phone. Check with your phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone- mobile service provider for the features that you have. book entries, if available. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call• To call one of the names in the list, press the button Currently In Progress during the playing of the desired name, and say “Call”. When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the 3NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” Uconnect௡ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,operations at this point. if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the call,• The Uconnect௡ Phone will then prompt you as to the press and hold the button until you hear a single beep, number designation you wish to call. indicating that the incoming call was rejected.• The selected number will be dialed. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — CallPhone Call Features Currently In ProgressThe following features can be accessed through the If a call is currently in progress and you have anotherUconnect௡ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your incoming call, you will hear the same network tones formobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service call waiting that you normally hear when using yourplan provides three-way calling, this feature can be mobile phone. Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
  • 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The Uconnect௡ Phone compatible phones in the Place/Retrieve A Call From Holdmarket today do not support rejecting an incoming call To put a call on hold, press the button until you hearwhen another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. Toonly answer an incoming call or ignore it. bring the call back from hold, press and hold the but-Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In ton until you hear a single beep.Progress Toggling Between CallsTo make a second call while you are currently on a call, If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed press the button until you hear a single beep, indicat-by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to ing that the active and hold status of the two calls havecall. The first call will be on hold while the second call is switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “TogglingBetween Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer Conference Callto “Conference Call” in this section. When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153Three-Way Calling RedialTo initiate three-way calling, press the button while • Press the button to begin.a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, saydescribed under “Making a Second Call While Current “Redial”.Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,press and hold the button until you hear a double • The Uconnect௡ Phone will call the last number that 3beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into was dialed from your mobile phone.one conference call. NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from theCall Termination Uconnect௡ Phone.To end a call in progress, momentarily press the but- Call Continuationton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on theis a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the Uconnect௡ Phone after the vehicle ignition has beenactive call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-hold may not become active automatically. This is cell able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, pressand hold the button until you hear a single beep. • After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect௡ Phone either until the call
  • 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the cessation of the call on the Uconnect௡ Phone and language selection. transfer of the call to the mobile phone. After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and• After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue voice commands will be in that language. on the Uconnect௡ Phone for a certain duration, after NOTE: After every Uconnect௡ Phone language change which the call is automatically transferred from the operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone- Uconnect௡ Phone to the mobile phone. book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-• An active call is automatically transferred to the specific and is usable across all languages. mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Emergency AssistanceUconnectா Phone Features If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone isLanguage Selection reachable:To change the language that the Uconnect௡ Phone is using: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency• Press the button to begin. number for your area.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to English, Espanol, or Francais.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect௡ Phone is • The Uconnect௡ Phone does slightly lower youroperational, you may reach the emergency number as chances of successfully making a phone call as to thatfollows: for the mobile phone directly.• Press the button to begin. WARNING!• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 3 “Emergency” and the Uconnect௡ Phone will instruct the To use you Uconnect௡ Phone System in an emer- paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This gency, your mobile phone must be: feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. • turned on, • paired to the Uconnect௡ System,NOTE: • and have network coverage.• The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Roadside Assistance Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may If you need roadside assistance: not be applicable with the available mobile service and • Press the button to begin. area.• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say some systems. To do this, press the button and say “Roadside Assistance”. “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
  • 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Voice Mail Calling• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069 with Automated Systems”. for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Working With Automated Systems Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside Assistance” This method is used in instances where one generally has coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Informa- to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while tion Booklet and the Roadside Assistance references. navigating through an automated telephone system.• If supported, this number may be programmable on You can use your Uconnect௡ Phone to access a voice mail some systems. To do this, press the button and say system or an automated service, such as a paging service “Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”. or automated customer service line. Some services re- quire immediate response selection. In some instances,Paging that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect௡ Phone.To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated When calling a number with your Uconnect௡ Phone thatSystems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequencecertain companies, which time out a little too soon to on your mobile phone keypad, you can press thework properly with the Uconnect௡ Phone.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 button and say the sequence you wish to enter, NOTE:followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phoneenter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you network configurations. This is normal.can press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”.Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time“Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an out settings that are too short and may not allow the 3automated customer service center menu structure, and use of this feature.to leave a number on a pager. Barge In — Overriding PromptsYou can also send stored Uconnect௡ phonebook entries as The “Voice Command” button can be used when youtones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voiceentries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to command immediately. For example, if a prompt iscall and then press the button and say, “Send.” The asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” yousystem will prompt you to enter the name or number and could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” tosay the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. select that option without having to listen to the rest ofThe Uconnect௡ Phone will then send the corresponding the voice prompt.phone number associated with the phonebook entry, astones over the phone.
  • 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETurning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF Dialing Using The Mobile Phone KeypadTurning confirmation prompts off will stop the system You can dial a phone number with your mobile phonefrom confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect௡ Phone keypad and still use the Uconnect௡ Phone (while dialingwill not repeat a phone number before you dial it). via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise• Press the button to begin. caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ mobile• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s one of the following: audio system. The Uconnect௡ Phone will work the same – “Setup Confirmation Prompts On” as if you dial the number using Voice Command. – “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off” NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send thePhone And Network Status Indicators dial ring to the Uconnect௡ Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-If available on the radio and/or on a premium display tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feelsuch as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by that the call did not go through even though the call is inyour mobile phone, the Uconnect௡ Phone will provide progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear thenotification to inform you of your phone and network audio.status when you are attempting to make a phone callusing Uconnect௡ Phone. The status is given for networksignal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF) from your Uconnect௡ Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone or vice versa, press the button andWhen you mute the Uconnect௡ Phone, you will still beable to hear the conversation coming from the other say “Transfer Call”.party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In Connect Or Disconnect Link Between Theorder to mute the Uconnect௡ Phone: Uconnect௡ Phone And Mobile Phone 3• Press the button. Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”• Following the beep, say “Mute”. with one electronic device at a time.In order to un-mute the Uconnect௡ Phone: If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡• Press the button. connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect௡ Phone System, follow the instructions de-• Following the beep, say “Mute off”. scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Mobile Phone NamesTransfer Call To And From Mobile Phone • Press the button to begin.The Uconnect௡ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, saywithout terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call “Setup Phone Pairing”.
  • 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• When prompted, say “List Phones”. • The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the• The Uconnect௡ Phone will play the phone names of all Uconnect௡ Phone will return to using the highest paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the priority phone present in or near (approximately lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle. being announced, press the button and say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for Delete Uconnect௡ Phone Paired Mobile Phones an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone. • Press the button to begin.Select Another Mobile Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayThis feature allows you to select and start using another “Setup Phone Pairing”.phone paired with the Uconnect௡ Phone. • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the• Press the button to begin. prompts.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the button at any time while the “Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts. list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete.• You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161Things You Should Know About Your Uconnectா You can either press the Uconnect௡ Phone button to restorePhone the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect௡ Phone. For best results, theUconnect௡ Phone Tutorial Voice Training session should be completed when theTo hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows button and say “Uconnect௡ Tutorial.” closed, and the blower fan switched off. 3Voice Training This procedure may be repeated with a new user. TheFor users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz- system will adapt to the last trained voice only.ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect௡ ResetPhone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter thistraining mode, follow one of the two following procedures: • Press the button.From outside the Uconnect௡ Phone mode (e.g., from • After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, sayradio mode): “Setup”, then “Reset”.• Press and hold the button for five seconds until This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, the session begins, or, and other settings in all language modes. The System will• Press the button and say the “Voice Training”, prompt you before resetting to factory settings. “System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” command.
  • 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVoice Command • smooth road surface,• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to • fully closed windows, provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead • dry weather condition. console (if equipped) and the mirror. • Even though the system is designed for users speaking• Always wait for the beep before speaking. in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- cents, the system may not always work for some.• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from • When navigating through an automated system such you. as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period. • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.• Performance is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect௡ Phonebook. • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise, • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect௡ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must • fully closed windows, be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”. • dry weather conditions, and• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • operation from the driver’s seat.• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect௡ Phone. 3 number combinations may not be supported.• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced compromised with the convertible top down. by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.Far End Audio Performance • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.• Audio quality is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, Recent Calls • low-to-medium vehicle speed, If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down- • low road noise, load”, Uconnect௡ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- ing and Missed Calls. • smooth road surface,
  • 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESMS Send Messages:Uconnect௡ Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect௡ Phone. To sendyour phone. a new message:Read Messages: • Press the button.If you receive a new text message while your phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayconnected to Uconnect௡ Phone, an announcement will be “SMS Send” or “Send Message.”made to notify you that you have a new text message. If • You can either say the message you wish to send or sayyou wish to hear the new message: “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.• Press the button. To send a message, press the button while the• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say system is listing the message and say “Send.” “SMS Read” or “Read Messages.” Uconnect௡ Phone will prompt you to say the name or• Uconnect௡ Phone will play the new text message for number of the person you wish to send the message to. you. List of Preset Messages:After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” 1. Yesthe message using Uconnect௡ Phone. 2. No
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1653. Where are you? 16. Can this wait?4. I need more direction. 17. Bye for now5. L O L 18. When can we meet?6. Why 19. Send number to call 37. I love you 20. Start without me8. Call me Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF9. Call me later Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes-10. Thanks sages.11. See You in 15 minutes • Press the button.12. I am on my way • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say13. I’ll be late “Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you will then be given a choice to change it.14. Are you there yet?15. Where are we meeting?
  • 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEBluetooth௡ Communication Link Power-UpMobile phones have been found to lose connection to the After switching the ignition from OFF to either the ON orUconnect௡ Phone. When this happens, the connection ACC position, or after a language change, you must waitcan generally be reestablished by switching the phone at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain inBluetooth௡ ON mode.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 3
  • 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 3
  • 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s) zero all one call two cancel three confirmation prompts four continue five delete six dial seven download eight edit nine emergency star (*) English plus (+) erase all pound (#) Espanol add location Francais
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s) help previous home record again language redial 3 list names return to main menu return or main menu list phones select phone select mobile send mute set up phone settings or mute off phone set up new entry towing assistance no transfer call other Uconnect௡ Tutorialpair a phone voice trainingphone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes
  • 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEGeneral Information VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPEDThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System OperationRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions: The Uconnect௡ Voice Command system allows• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player, the party responsible for compliance could void the USB mass storage class device, iPOD family of user’s authority to operate the equipment. devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device, satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.• This device may not cause harmful interference. NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys-• This device must accept any interference received, tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the including interference that may cause undesired op- Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands eration. may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Pressing the Voice Command button while the WARNING! system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system Any voice commanded system should be used only will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or in safe driving conditions following all applicable change commands. This will become helpful once you laws. Your attention should be focused on safely start to learn the options. operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, 3 collision causing serious injury or death. “Help” or “Main Menu”.When you press the Voice Command button, you These commands are universal and can be used from anywill hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending uponcommand. the active application.NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and atseconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.options. The system will best recognize your speech if the win-If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan isoptions, press the Voice Command button, listen for set to low.the beep, and say your command.
  • 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAt any point, if the system does not recognize one of your 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust thecommands, you will be prompted to repeat it. volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- mand system is speaking. Please note the volumeTo hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- setting for Voice Command is different than the audiomand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”. system.Commands Main MenuThe Voice Command system understands two types ofcommands. Universal commands are available at all Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to thetimes. Local commands are available if the supported main menu.radio mode is active.Changing the Volume In this mode, you can say the following commands:1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command • “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode) button. • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) • “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth௡ Radio FM Streaming mode) To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) this mode, you may say the following commands:• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup) • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)Radio AM • “Next Station” (to select the next station) 3To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)• “Next Station” (to select the next station) Satellite Radio• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken number)
  • 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel) USB Mode• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) • “Next Track” (to play the next track)• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) Name, Track Name, etc.)Disc Mode Bluetooth௡ Streaming (BT) ModeTo switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth௡ Streaming (BT) mode, saymay say the following commands: “Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the• “Track” (#) (to change the track) following commands:• “Next Track” (to play the next track) • “Next Track” (to play the next track)• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “List” (to list a Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177Memo Mode – “Previous” (to play the previous memo)To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In – “Delete” (to delete a memo)this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Delete All” (to delete all memos)• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the Setup recording, you may press the Voice Command 3 button to stop recording. You proceed by saying To switch to system setup, you may say one of the one of the following commands: following: – “Save” (to save the memo) • “Change to setup” – “Continue” (to continue recording) • “Switch to system setup” – “Delete” (to delete the recording) • “Change to setup”• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Main menu setup” or During the playback you may press the Voice Com- • “Switch to setup” mand button to stop playing memos. You pro- ceed by saying one of the following commands: In this mode, you may say the following commands: – “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) • “Language English” – “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Language French”
  • 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• “Language Spanish” 2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect௡ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”• “Tutorial” session should be completed when the vehicle is• “Voice Training” parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re-NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice peated with a new user. The system will adapt to theCommand button first and wait for the beep before last trained voice only.speaking the “Barge In” commands.Voice Training SEATSFor users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of thenizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect௡ vehicle.Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used. WARNING!1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or Training.” This will train your own voice to the system outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in and will improve recognition. these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. (Continued)
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and 3 using a seat belt properly.Power Seats — If EquippedSome models may be equipped with eight-way powerseats for the driver and front passenger. The power seatswitches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The Driver Power Seat Switchswitches control the movement of the seat cushion and 1 — Seat Switch 2 — Seatback Switchthe seatback.
  • 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION!• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Do not place any article under a power seat or impede Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat control which could cause a collision and serious controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement injury or death. is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. seat belt. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch shoulder belt is no longer resting against your when the desired position has been reached. chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181Tilting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING!The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in fourdirections. Pull upward or push downward on the front • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat Moving a seat while driving could result in loss ofcushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release control which could cause a collision and seriousthe switch when the desired position has been reached. injury or death. 3 • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatReclining The Seatback belts and while the vehicle is parked. SeriousThe angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or injury or death could result from a poorly adjustedrearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, seat belt.the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that thethe switch when the desired position is reached. shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
  • 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.Power Lumbar — If EquippedVehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seatsmay be also be equipped with power lumbar. The powerlumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the Power Lumbar Switchpower seat. Push the switch forward to increase thelumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease Heated Seats — If Equippedthe lumbar support. On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start WARNING! On models that are equipped with remote start, the• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting Sys- spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- tem — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting tion or other physical condition must exercise care Your Vehicle” for further information. 3 when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for Front Heated Seats long periods of time. There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that and passenger to operate the seats independently. The insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. controls for each heater are located on the switch bank This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting below the climate controls. in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera- You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. ture of the seat. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
  • 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the switch once to select HIGH-level Rear Heated Seats heating. Press the switch a second time to select On some models, the second row seats are equipped with LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the time to shut the heating elements OFF. second row passengers to operate the seats indepen-NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt dently. The heated seat switches are located on the slidingwithin two to five minutes. side door handle trim panels.When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater willprovide a boosted heat level during the initial stages ofoperation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normalHIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, thesystem will automatically switch to LOW-level afterapproximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. Atthat time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turnOFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes. Second Row Heated Seat Switch
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Manual Front/Second Row Seat AdjusterAmber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. Theheat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seatone for LOW and none for OFF. cushion at the front edge of each seat. Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select 3 LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be feltwithin two to five minutes.When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater willprovide a boosted heat level during the initial stages ofoperation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normalHIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the sys-tem will automatically switch to LOW-level after approxi-mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the Manual Seat Adjusterdisplay will change from HIGH to LOW, indicating thechange. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF automaticallyafter approximately 45 minutes.
  • 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhile sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide Manual Reclining Seats — If Equippedthe seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you For models equipped with manual reclining seats, thehave reached the desired position. Then, using body recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to besure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Manual Recline Lever
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push WARNING!back to the desired position and release the lever. Leanforward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a 3 WARNING! vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the event of a collision. shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, Active Head Restraints — Front Seats which could result in serious injury or death. Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-Head Restraints nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be splitby restricting head movement in the event of a rear in two halves, with the front half being soft foam andimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top trim, the back half being decorative plastic.of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
  • 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhen AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front halfof the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gapbetween the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.This system is designed to help prevent or reduce theextent of injuries to the driver and front passenger incertain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-hicle” for further informationTo raise the head restraint, pull upward on the headrestraint. To lower the head restraint, press the pushbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and pushdownward on the head restraint. Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 3Active Head Restraint (Normal Position) Active Head Restraint (Tilted) NOTE: • The head restraints should only be removed by quali- fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your autho- rized dealer.
  • 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re- WARNING! (Continued) straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before • Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active WARNING! Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint • Do not place items over the top of the Active Head during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re- DVD players. These items may interfere with the straint is deployed. operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats death. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push (Continued) button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Head Restraints — Third Row The head restraint in the center position can be raised and lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 3 Stow ’n Goா Seating — If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go௡ seating, the second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for convenient storage. Second Row Stow ’n Go௡ Push Button On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go௡ seats, the seatsHead Restraints — Second Row Bench will fold and tumble in one motion.To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head 1. Move the front seat fully forward.restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the pushbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and push 2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.downward on the head restraint. 3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
  • 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the 5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located onarmrests are raised. the outboard side of the seat.4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the “LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head Restraint Fold Lever Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will foldautomatically during the seat tumble. No additionalactuation is necessary. 3 Automatic Folding Seatback Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
  • 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe seat will automatically tumble into position for easy 6. Push the seat into the storage bin.storage. Seat In Storage Bin Tumbled Second Row Seat 7. Close the storage bin cover.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 To Unstow Second Row Seats CAUTION! 1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.The storage bin cover must be locked and flat toavoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, 2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storagewhich have minimal clearance to the cover. bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors. 3 WARNING! 3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat 4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, closestorage bin covers are not properly latched. the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers mechanism to the “Unlocked” position. open. Stow ’n Go௡ Seat — Folded And Latched Position• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion. To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. position: return the seatback and head restraint to the upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward.
  • 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE1. Return the seatback to the upright position. 2. Return the head restraint to the upright position. Raising The Seatback Raising The Head Restraint 3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197Easy Entry Second Row The seat will automatically fold into position for easyThe second row Stow ’n Go௡ seats allow easy entry to the entry into the third row.third row seat or rear cargo area. WARNING!Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboardside of the seat. In the event of a collision you could be injured if the seat is not fully latched. 3 Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head Restraint Fold Lever
  • 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEQuad Seats — If Equipped While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slideBoth Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once youmanual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to becushion at the front edge of each seat. sure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Manual Seat Adjuster
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199Manual Recline WARNING!To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then pushback to the desired position and release the lever. Lean Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that theforward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. which could result in serious injury or death. 3 Recline Lever
  • 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFold-Flat Easy EntryTo fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry intoposition and push the seatback forward until it rests on the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position,the seat cushion. lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of the seat and lift the seat forward. Fold-Flat Quad Seat Easy Entry Lever
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull Removalstrap located on the outboard side of the seat near the The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage isbottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, lift thethe strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the cross beam forward and up to release the front anchorseatback and accessing the easy entry lever. latches. 3 Pull Strap for Third Row Passengers Cross Beam For Seat Removal
  • 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESecond Row Bench Seat — If Equipped indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle andWhile the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is moved on its Easy Out௡ Rollers.removable for added cargo space. Release Handles Second Row Bench SeatRelease levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, nearthe floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handleand rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posi-tions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotateupward until the lock indicator button returns into thehandle. WARNING! 3 If not properly latched, the bench seats could become loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstall- ing these seats, be sure the red indicator button on the release handles return into the handles.Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped Third Row Power Seat SwitchThe power recline feature, located on the side of the seat Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equippedcushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearwardfor occupant comfort. A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
  • 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the The switch is only functional when the liftgate is openrelease strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of and the vehicle is in PARK.the head restraint. One Touch Folding Seat Third Row Head Restraint Release Strap “1” The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205Left and right third row seats can be folded individually NOTE:or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to • Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the smallthe following positions using the switch bank located onthe left rear trim panel: buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting to fold/stow the power third row seats. • To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a 3 different seat position selector switch to stop the seat. Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position can be selected. • The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection for safe operation. When the system detects an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the motion a short distance to move the seat away from the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle and press the button again, for the desired position. Rear Panel Power Switch Bank1 — Open to Normal 2 — Stow3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat 4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
  • 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEManually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head restraint down.2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of the head restraint. Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2073. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the 4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors. seat to lower the seatback. 3 Release Strap “3” Release Strap “2”
  • 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin. Stowed Third Row Seat To Unfold Third Row Seats Release Strap “4” 1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch. 2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2093. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its WARNING! full upright position.4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position. To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode. WARNING! 3 In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and latched. some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods.Tailgate Mode DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to rotate the entire seat rearward. The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the mirrors, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals, and seatback and push forward until the anchors latch. radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
  • 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one. 1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. Driver Memory Switch The system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continu-Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE ing to Step 3.transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked toeach of the memory positions. 3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s side- view mirror to the desired positions. 4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2115. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets 11. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic (up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set). Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Un- remove the key. derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the formation. 3 driver’s door. 12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY position using the other numbered Memory button button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must or to link another RKE transmitter to memory. be performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use Memory Position Recall a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions. NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not transmitters. in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to To recall the memory settings for driver one, press the ON position. MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
  • 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo recall the memory setting for driver two, press 3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button locatedMEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling thatbutton on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Posi- you are in the memory set mode.tion 2. 4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORYA recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door. A chime will soundbuttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, 1, or 2). signaling to you that the driver memory has been set.When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, outside mir- 5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCKrors, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second button on the RKE transmitter. A chime will soundwill occur before another recall can be selected. signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has beenTo Disable RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory successfully disabled.1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either remove the key. Memory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE transmitter.2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seatto memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time. will return to its previously set position when youRefer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out ofCustomer-Programmable FeaturesЉ in “Understanding the LOCK position.Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • When you remove the key from the ignition switch theEasy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) 3ONLY) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of theThis feature provides automatic driver seat positioning toenhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignitionvehicle. switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.The distance the driver seat moves depends on whereyou have the driver seat positioned when you remove the • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when thekey from the ignition switch. driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no• When you remove the key from the ignition switch, benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rear- or Easy Entry. ward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal
  • 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEEach stored memory setting will have an associated Easy TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOODEntry and Easy Exit Position. To open the hood, two latches must be released.NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled 1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrumentor disabled through the programmable features in the panel, below the steering column.Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If yourvehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealershipcan activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details,refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information. Hood Release Lever
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2152. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the position. safety catch downward while raising the hood at the same time. 3 Hood Prop Rod Safety Lever Location
  • 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS CAUTION! Headlight SwitchTo prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood toclose it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately The headlight switch is located on the left side of the12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should secure both instrument panel. The switch controls the operation oflatches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,fully closed, with both latches engaged. interior lights and the fog lights. WARNING!Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving yourvehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could openwhen the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.Failure to follow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death. Headlight Switch With Halo Control
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent Headlights On With Wipers — If Equippedfor parking light and instrument panel light operation. When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and theRotate the headlight switch to the second detent for engine is running, the headlights will automatically turnheadlight, parking light and instrument panel operation. on when the wiper system is also turned on. HeadlightsAutomatic Headlights — If Equipped on when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system. 3This system automatically turns your headlights on or off Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understandingthe headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise Your Instrument Panel” for further information.position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on theheadlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Headlight Delay — If EquippedTime Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights This feature provides the safety of headlight illuminationwill stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF) To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switchposition. while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If thelights will come on in the Automatic mode. headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
  • 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhen exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have Lights-On Reminderthe headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if theremain on. To change the timer setting, see your autho- dimmer control is in the extreme top position after therized dealer. ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound whenThe headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles the driver’s door is opened.equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Daytime Running Lights — If EquippedInformation Center (EVIC)/Customer-ProgrammableFeatures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when thefurther information. engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condi-If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminatewill turn off in the normal manner. at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brakeNOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec- is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turnonds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature. off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219Front Fog Lights — If Equipped To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push in theheadlight switch control knob. Pressing the headlightswitch control knob in a second time will turn the frontfog lights off. 3Dimmer ControlsThe dimmer switch is located next to the headlightswitch. Dimmer Control With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
  • 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEInterior Lighting On NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or theRotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the ignition switch must be in the OFF position for thissecond detent (extreme top position) to turn on the feature to operate.interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the Interior Lighting Offdimmer control is in this position. Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position (extremeInterior lights are also turned on when a door or liftgate bottom). The interior lights will remain off when theis opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is doors or liftgate are open.activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)extreme top. Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent. ThisThe interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi- feature brightens the odometer, radio and overheadmately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds displays when the parking lights or headlights are on.every activation thereafter until the engine is started, ifone of the following occur: Halo Lights — If Equipped• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in• Any overhead reading light is left on locating specific features while driving at night.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221The Halo control switch is located to the right of the Multifunction Leverdimmer switch. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. 3 Halo Control To activate the Halo lights, rotate the Halo Multifunction Lever switch control upward or downward to in- crease or decrease the lighting.
  • 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe multifunction lever controls the: Turn Signal Warning• Turn Signals If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile• Headlight Beams Low/High (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to• Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn) alert the driver.• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions Lane Change AssistTurn Signals Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flashMove the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows three times then automatically turn off.on each side of the instrument cluster flash to showproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. High/Low Beam SwitchNOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi-there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside function lever toward the instrument panel will switchlight bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to themoved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is neutral position returns the headlights to the low beamdefective. operation.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223Flash-To-Pass WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSYou can signal another vehicle with your headlights by The wipers and washers are operated by a switch withinlightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc-will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.remain on until the lever is released. 3Battery ProtectionThis feature provides battery protection to avoid wearingdown the battery if the headlights, parking lights, orfront fog lights are left on for extended periods of timewhen the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. Aftereight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCKposition and the headlight switch in any position otherthan OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automaticallyuntil the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlightswitch.The battery protection feature will be disabled if the Washer And Wiper Controlsignition switch is turned to any other position other thanLOCK during the eight minute delay.
  • 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre- Intermittent Wiper Systemvents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditionsoff position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-to the wiper motor may occur. tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There WARNING! are six delay settings which includes high, which allow Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one could lead to a collision. You might not see other cycle every second to a maximum of approximately vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will the windshield during freezing weather, warm the double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph windshield with the defroster before and during (16 km/h) or less. windshield washer use. Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225Windshield Washers Rear Wiper And WasherTo use the Washer, push on the end of the lever to the Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates thesecond detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotateis pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spraywill turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit-lever is released, and then resume the intermittent inter- tent interval. 3val previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittentwipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate wiper speed only.several wipe cycles, then turn off. Rain Sensing Wipers — If EquippedMist Feature This feature senses moisture on the windshield andPress the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward automatically activates the wipers for the driver. Thisthe steering column) to the first detent and release for a feature is especially useful for road splash or overspraysingle wiping cycle. from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. RotateNOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer the end of the multifunction lever to one of the fivepump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate thiswindshield. The wash function must be used in order to feature.spray the windshield with washer fluid.
  • 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and offmultifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electroniccalibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the opera- Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settingstor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2 The Rain Sensing system has protective features for theor 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under thewhen not using the system. following conditions:NOTE: • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the feature will not operate when the ignition is first wiper speed is in the low or high position. switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or the when ice or dried saltwater is present on the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or windshield. the outside temperature rises above freezing.• Use of Rain-X௡ or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmis- This feature allows you to tilt the steering column sion shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or located below the steering wheel at the end of the the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position. steering column. 3• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist. Tilt/Telescoping Lever
  • 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo unlock the steering column, push the lever downward HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the The steering wheel contains a heating element that helpssteering wheel upward or downward as desired. To warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steeringlengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heatedwheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering wheel has been turned on it will operate forsteering column in position, push the lever upward until approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shut-fully engaged. ting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. WARNING! The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch Do not adjust the steering column while driving. bank below the climate controls. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause Press the switch to turn on the heated the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to steering wheel. The light on the switch follow this warning may result in serious injury or will illuminate to indicate the steering death. wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated WARNING! (Continued)steering wheel to operate. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel thatVehicles Equipped With Remote Start insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steeringOn models that are equipped with remote start, the wheel covers of any type and material. This mayheated steering wheel can be programmed to come on cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting Sys- 3tem — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPEDYour Vehicle” for further information. The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and WARNING! seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, from the driver to provide improved position with the spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- steering wheel. tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. (Continued)
  • 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe switch is located on the left side of the steering Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearwardcolumn. (toward the driver). • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF. • The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys- tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa- tion System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad- justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”. Adjustable Pedal SwitchPress the switch forward to move the pedals forward(toward the front of the vehicle).
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231NOTE: WARNING!• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel. Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and have an accident. Always• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked. the best possible seat/pedal position. 3 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage (40 km/h). to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim- ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal’s path.
  • 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-right side of the steering wheel. tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. To Activate Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. Electronic Speed Control Buttons1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without WARNING! erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally speed memory. set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. To Resume Speed You could lose control and have an accident. Always 3 leave the system OFF when you are not using it. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speedTo Set A Desired Speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle To Vary The Speed Settinghas reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the buttonoperate at the selected speed. is continually pressed, the set speed will continue toNOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed increase until the button is released, then the new setand on level ground before pressing the SET button. speed will be established.To Deactivate Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap ofA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
  • 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintainsset, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually speed up and down hills. A slight speed change onheld in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to moderate hills is normal.decrease until the button is released. Release the button On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur sowhen the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speedwill be established. Control.Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of WARNING!the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where theTo Accelerate For Passing system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and youpedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roadsUsing Electronic Speed Control On Hills that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain thevehicle set speed.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235PARKSENSEா REAR PARK ASSIST — ParkSenseா SensorsIF EQUIPPED The four ParkSense௡ sensors, located in the rear fascia/The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system provides visual bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that isand audible indications of the distance between the rear within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detectfascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 induring a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense௡ System (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal 3Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-recommendations. tion of the obstacle.ParkSense௡ will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSenseா Warning Displaydisabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense௡ Warning screen will only be displayed ifchanged to the ON/RUN position. Sound and Display is selected from the Customer-ParkSense௡ can be active only when the shift lever is in Programmable Features section of the Electronic VehicleREVERSE. If ParkSense௡ is enabled at this shift lever Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicleposition, the system will remain active until the vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-above. The system will become active again if the vehicle strument Panel” for further information.speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately10 mph (16 km/h).
  • 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe ParkSense௡ Warning Display is located in the Instru- ParkSenseா Displayment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning displayaudible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status.rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Park Assist System ON ParkSense௡ Warning Display
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. 3Park Assist System OFF Slow Tone
  • 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than (in/cm) 79 in (200 cm) (200-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm) Audible Alert None Single 1/2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone 3 Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow (Continuous) Flashing Flashing Flashing Radio Mute No Yes Yes Yes YesNOTE: ParkSense௡ will MUTE the radio, if on, when the When ParkSense௡ is disabled, the instrument cluster willsystem is sounding an audio tone. display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic VehicleEnabling/Disabling ParkSenseா Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding YourParkSense௡ can be enabled and disabled through the Instrument Panel” for further information. When theCustomer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC. shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system isThe available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable REVERSE.Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.
  • 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEService The ParkSenseா Rear Park Assist System If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.When the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist System is mal-functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single Cleaning The ParkSenseா Systemchime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors with water, car wash soapPARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do notVehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When age the sensors.the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has ParkSenseா System Usage Precautionsdetected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the NOTE:vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,will not operate. dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense௡ system operat-If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the ing properly.Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations couldthe outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/ affect the performance of ParkSense௡.bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or otherobstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the messagecontinues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241• When you turn ParkSense௡ off, the instrument cluster obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Further- a false indication that an obstacle is behind the more, once you turn ParkSense௡ off, it remains off fascia/bumper. until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., key. must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do 3 position and ParkSense௡ is turned off, the EVIC will so can result in the system misinterpreting a close display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the EVIC .• ParkSense௡, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone. • On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense௡ should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered• Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors regularly, taking care not or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. an obstacle is behind the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense௡ system might not detect an
  • 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! WARNING!• ParkSense௡ is only a parking aid and it is unable to • Drivers must be careful when backing up even recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind detected at all. Obstacles located above or below you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, the sensors will not be detected when they are in other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before close proximity. backing up. You are responsible for safety and• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using must continue to pay attention to your surround- ParkSense௡ in order to be able to stop in time when ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the death. driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense௡. (Continued)
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 PARKVIEWா REAR BACK UP CAMERA — WARNING! (Continued) IF EQUIPPED• Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ Rear hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve- Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be 3 vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia screen along with a caution note to “check entire sur- when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec- Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and onds this note will disappear. The ParkView௡ camera is hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is plate. behind the vehicle. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
  • 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhen displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width that will help indicate the distance to the rear of theof the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the vehicle. The following table shows the approximatecenter of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/ distances for each zone:receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater) WARNING! CAUTION! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView௡ should only using the ParkView௡ Rear Back Up Camera. Always be used as a parking aid. The ParkView௡ camera is check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc- drive path. tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are respon- sible for the safety of your surroundings and must (Continued) continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting CAUTION! (Continued) the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView௡ to be able to 5. Press the “save” soft-key. stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom- Turning ParkViewா On Or Off — Without mended that the driver look frequently over his/her Navigation/Multimedia Radio shoulder when using ParkView௡. 3 1. Press the “menu” hard-key.NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance 2. Select “system setup” soft-key.builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse withwater, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. 3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.Turning ParkViewா On Or Off — WithNavigation/Multimedia Radio1. Press the “menu” hard-key.2. Select “system setup” soft-key.3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
  • 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOVERHEAD CONSOLESFront Overhead ConsoleTwo versions of the overhead console are available. Thebase front overhead console model featured fixed incan-descent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor-age and conversation mirror. The premium front over-head console model features a LED focused light thatilluminates the instrument panel cupholders, two swiv-eling LED lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversa-tion mirror, optional power sliding door switches and anoptional power liftgate switch. Overhead ConsoleNOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all ofabove except sunglass storage. Courtesy/Interior Lighting At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights (standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only)(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK At the front of the overhead console, a compartment isbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed. provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press From the closed position, press the door latch to open thein on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the compartment.vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You 3may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing theoutside ring, which is identified with four directionalarrows (LED lamps only).The area around the instrument panel cupholders is alsoilluminated from a light in the overhead console (pre-mium console only). This light is turned on when theheadlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness whenthe dimmer control is rotated up or down. Over Door Latch
  • 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe door will slowly rotate to the full open position. Conversation Mirror Position Full Open Position NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, theFrom this position, the door can be fully closed or, by door can only be closed.rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing, To return to the full open position, the door must first bepositioned for conversation mirror use. closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to release.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If EquippedThe overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. Thelights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or theliftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped withRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn onwhen the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is 3pressed.The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Pressin on each lens to turn these lights on while inside thevehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressingthe outside ring, which is identified with four directional Reading Lightsarrows. Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped The rear overhead storage system is available in two versions: with or without sunroof. An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode, for added convenience.
  • 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Console Halo Lighting The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting around the perimeter of the console base. This feature provides additional lighting options while traveling and is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/ Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED HomeLink௡ replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor- Overhead Compartment Features ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink௡ unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt1 — DVD* 5 — Storage battery.2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD*3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights The HomeLink௡ buttons, located on either the overhead4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-* If equipped, otherwise storage. ent HomeLink௡ channels. The HomeLink௡ indicator is located above the center button.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 3HomeLink௡ Buttons/Overhead Consoles HomeLink௡ Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner NOTE: HomeLink௡ is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- rity Alarm is active.
  • 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEBefore You Begin Programming HomeLinkா NOTE:Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed whenbefore you begin programming. programming HomeLink௡ for the first time. Do notFor more efficient programming and accurate transmis- erase channels when programming additional buttons.sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleasea new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atthe device that is being programmed to the HomeLink௡ www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.system. Programming A Rolling CodeErase all channels before you begin programming. Toerase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manu-position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink௡ factured after 1995. These garage door openers can bebuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button locatedindicator flashes. where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to pro- gram while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view. 3 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink௡ button you want to program and the hand-held trans- mitter button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- cator light. The HomeLink௡ indicator will flash slowly Training The Garage Door Opener and then rapidly after HomeLink௡ has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-1 — Door Opener lease both buttons after the indicator light changes2 — Training Button from slow to rapid.
  • 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons, locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels. attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Programming A Non-Rolling Code Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured there may be a light that blinks when the garage door before 1995. opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)step after the LEARN button has been pressed. away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to pro-6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed gram while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in HomeLink௡ button twice (holding the button for two view. seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink௡ activates, programming is complete. button you want to program and the hand-held trans-NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- mitter button.vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) tocomplete the training.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2554. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkா Button cator light. The Homelink௡ indicator will flash slowly To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, and then rapidly after HomeLink௡ has received the follow these steps: frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- lease both buttons after the indicator light changes 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. from slow to rapid. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until 35. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ button the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. and observe the indicator light. Do not release the button. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- ming is complete and the garage door/device should ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining activate when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed. steps. • To program the two remaining HomeLink௡ buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.
  • 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans- cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly whenmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink௡ fully trained.to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this 4. Watch for the HomeLink௡ indicator to change flashCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may taketime-out in the same manner. up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garageIt may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling door may open and close while you are programming.process to prevent possible overheating of the garage 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ buttondoor or gate motor. and observe the indicator light.1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) ming is complete and the garage door/device should away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to program activate when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed. while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view. • To program the two remaining HomeLink௡ buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink௡ button, erase the channels. while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink௡ has
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for Using HomeLinkாprogramming, plug it back in at this time. To operate, press and release the programmedReprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button HomeLink௡ button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-follow these steps: 3 ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. also be used at any time.2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until Security the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn Do not release the button. in your vehicle.3. Without releasing the button proceed with To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all follow all remaining steps. channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. The HomeLink௡ Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
  • 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETroubleshooting Tips WARNING!If you are having trouble programming HomeLink௡, hereare some of the most common solutions: • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans-• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit- ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, ter. pets or other objects are in the path of the door or• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door to complete the training for a Rolling Code. opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes• Did you unplug the device for programming and most garage door opener models manufactured remember to plug it back in? after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener withoutIf you have any problems, or require assistance, please these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com forwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259General Information NOTE:This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry • The transmitter has been tested and it complies withCanada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-two conditions: pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-1. This device may not cause harmful interference. ance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. 32. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde- • The term IC before the certification/registration num- sired operation. ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci- fications were met.
  • 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPOWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!The power sunroof switch is located between the sunvisors on the overhead console. • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particu- larly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen- gers are also properly secured. Power Sunroof Switch • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261Opening Sunroof — Express position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- cally. This is called “Express Close”. During ExpressPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half Close operation, any movement of the switch will stopsecond and the sunroof will open automatically from any the sunroof.position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Closing Sunroof — Manual ModeOpen operation, any movement of the sunroof switch 3 To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in thewill stop the sunroof. forward position. Any release of the switch will stop theOpening Sunroof — Manual Mode movement and the sunroof will remain in a partiallyTo open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and heldto full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially Pinch Protect Featureopened condition until the switch is pushed and held This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening ofrearward again. the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-Closing Sunroof — Express struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, thePress the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-second and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.
  • 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffetingin Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Wind buffeting can be described as the perception ofa Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in theVenting Sunroof — Express ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certainPress and release the Vent button within one half second open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withcalled “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of the rear windows open, open the front and rear windowssunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occursmovement of the switch will stop the sunroof. with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening toSunshade Operation minimize the buffeting or open any window.The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenancesunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to cleanNOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.open.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263Ignition Off Operation ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPEDFor Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on theInformation Center (EVIC) lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. TheThe power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignitionafter the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connectedOpening either front door will cancel this feature. directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will 3 also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equippedFor Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC with an optional Smoker’s Package).The power sunroof switch will remain active for up toapproximately ten minutes after the ignition switch isturned to the LOCK position. Opening either front doorwill cancel this feature.Sunroof Fully ClosedPress the switch forward and release to ensure that thesunroof is fully closed.
  • 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Instrument Panel OutletsNOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR௡ cigarknob and element must be used.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped) On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the powershares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument outlets are located under the retractable cover. To accesspanel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed the power outlets push down on the cover and slide ita maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared toward the instrument panel.between the lower panel outlet and the removable floorconsole outlet. 3 Super Console Outlets Removable Console Outlet
  • 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate andthe upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con-trolled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets cansupport 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with akey or battery symbol indicating the power source. Thepower outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, ispowered directly from the battery. Items plugged intothis power outlet may discharge the battery and/orprevent the engine from starting. Power Outlet Fuses 1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or with Console Rear 2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with Console Front 3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or with Console Center
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 WARNING! CAUTION!To avoid serious injury or death: • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if• Do not touch with wet hands. plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will 3• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or vehicle. prevent the engine from starting.• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, shock and failure. vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- tently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. (Continued)
  • 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces- sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPEDA 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) convertsDC current to AC current, and is located on the left reartrim panel immediately behind the second row leftpassenger seat. Power Inverter Outlet The power inverter switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls. To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and CUPHOLDERSother low power devices requiring power up to 150 There are cupholders located throughout the interior. AllWatts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta- liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible linertion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edgemost power tools. for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The InstrumentThe power inverter is designed with built-in overload Panel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for 3protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, further information.the power inverter will automatically shut down. Oncethe electrical device has been removed from the outlet theinverter should automatically reset. If the power ratingexceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power invertermay have to be reset manually. To reset the invertermanually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratingson electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
  • 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEInstrument Panel Cupholders variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the container to engage the cupholder retention features.The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-outdrawer just above the lower storage bin. Super Console — If Equipped On models equipped with the Super Console, there are two cupholders located in the center of the console. Front CupholdersPull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place thecontainer to be held in either one of the cupholder wells. Super Console CupholdersThe cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the Premium Console Cupholders — If Equippedpull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console. On models equipped with premium center consoles, therePull the drawer out to the first position to use the are four cupholders located on the top of the console.cupholders. 3 Premium Console Cupholders Rear Cupholders
  • 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEInterior Bottle HoldersThere are four bottle holders located in the interior. Onebottle holder is molded into each front interior door trimpanels, and one bottle holder is molded into each sidesliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo-dates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle. WARNING! If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn- ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury. Interior Bottle Holder Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating. The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes, toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273Smoker’s Package Kit — If EquippedWith the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’sPackage Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into oneof the two cupholders in the center front instrumentpanel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so thethumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash 3receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pullupward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaningand/or storage.The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-modate a second ash receiver, if desired. Upper and Lower Glove CompartmentsSTORAGE Upper Glove CompartmentGlove Compartments To open the upper compartment, press in on the button,Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the located on the left side of the upper door. The door willpassenger side of the instrument panel. automatically open.
  • 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lower Glove Compartment To open the lower compartment pull out on the release handle. Upper CompartmentTo close the compartment door, push downward on thedoor’s surface to latch the door closed. Lower Compartment NOTE: The lower compartment is equipped with a lock that is part of the compartment handle.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275Door Trim Panel StorageFront Door StorageBoth interior front door panels have multiple pockets forstorage.Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped 3The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on allmodels and an optional secondary mesh pocket. Driver’s Seatback Storage 1 — Bag Holder 2 — Standard Pocket 3 — Mesh Pocket
  • 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUmbrella Holder Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If EquippedAn umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into The seat storage bins are located on the floor in front ofthe left front door entry scuff molding. the second row seats. The area below the covers can be used for storage when the second row seat is in the upright position. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the ЉLockЉ position to allow greater access to the storage bin. Umbrella Holder
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 WARNING! In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched. • Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open. 3 • Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion. • Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. Storage Bin Safety Warning Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal Storage Bin injury or damage to your vehicle: CAUTION! WARNING!NOTE: The storage bin cover must be locked and flatto avoid damage from contact with the front seat • Always close the storage bin covers when yourtracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover. vehicle is unattended. (Continued)
  • 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!• Do not allow children to have access to the second The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, young children may not be able to escape. If which have minimal clearance to the cover. trapped in the storage bin, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an storage bin covers are not properly latched. Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha-• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers nism. open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion.• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion.• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 Coat Hooks Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle. 3 Cargo Area Storage The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement “Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate closing. Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release LeverNOTE: In the event of an individual being locked insidethe storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened frominside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-darklever attached to the storage bin cover latching mecha-nism.
  • 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONSOLE FEATURES There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and Super. WARNING! Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart- ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music players, and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac- tion, resulting in death or injury. Rear Cargo Area Loading LimitNOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot Basic Consolesheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor Basic Console features consist of the following:with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be movedslightly forward of the rearmost position. • The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to easily pass through the first row to the second.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are 1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly dishwasher safe for cleaning. higher than the rear).• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage 2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/ bin. hook. 3• The basic console is removable from the vehicle for 3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at is centered on the winch hole. the console base. 4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down-To Remove The Basic Floor Console ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip. cover plug.2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to 5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched. clear the rear load floor hook.3. Remove the console. WARNING! In an accident, serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed. (Continued)
  • 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Large console center storage will store headphones for WARNING! (Continued) the available rear DVD entertainment system or other Always be sure the removable floor console is fully items latched. • 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous powerPremium Console — If Equipped inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin, • Rear occupant accessiblesliding upper tray with storage and large console storage • Multiple adjustmentsbin offers multiple configurations. • Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean- ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large The top and center console sections slide forward and cups or mugs with handles. rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for• Top tray storage cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles. or other items Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders and a convenient storage tray.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283 3 Console Position 1 Console Position 2Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large Dual Storage Binsstorage area below. Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides easy access to the storage area below and provides two of the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
  • 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Console Position 3 Console Position 4Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost To Remove The Premium Floor Consoleposition. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of 1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of thethe console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin console.and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers. 2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/ centimeters.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2853. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove WARNING! console.To Reinstall The Premium Floor Console: In an accident, serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed.1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly Always be sure the removable floor console is fully higher than the front). latched. 32. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket. Super Console — If Equipped3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front on the floor bracket. lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated and rear pull out drawer. in the rear floor bracket. The super console contains a pass through storage area5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched. accessible for both the driver and front passenger.
  • 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Lower Pass Through Super ConsoleThe super console tambour doors are opened by pushing 1 — Front Sliding Tambour Doordown on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front 2 — Cupholder Light Ringtambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door 3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Doorslides rearward.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through RAM CARGO VAN FEATURESlighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the Ram Cargo Van Load Floorinstrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “UnderstandingThe Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. The Ram Cargo Van receives a structural aluminum rear load floor. Two load floor options are available, theLocated in the back of the super console is a storage standard floor with a flat aluminum surface and non skid 3drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers. strips or an optional deluxe floor with a flat aluminum surface and non skid strips, through-the-floor access to three storage bins and four load floor tie downs. WARNING! Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the load floor. While driving or in an accident you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may move around with force and strike occupants, resulting in serious or fatal injury. Rear Drawer Storage
  • 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Standard Load Floor (Rear View) Standard Load Floor
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289 3Deluxe Load Floor Storage Bin Locations (Rear View) Deluxe Load Floor Tie Down Locations (Rear View)
  • 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEREAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION!Rear Window Defroster Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to The rear window defroster button is located on the heating elements: the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button • Use care when washing the inside of the rearto turn on the rear window defroster and the heated window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners onoutside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button the interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothwill illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to theThe rear window defroster automatically turns off after heating elements. Labels can be peeled off afterapproximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes soaking with warm water.of operation, press the button a second time. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasiveNOTE: window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second time.• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win- dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed theThe automatic load leveling system will provide a level- maximum vehicle load capacity.riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loadingconditions.A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers 3raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takesapproximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the levelingto complete depending on road surface conditions.If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. Thevehicle must be driven to reset the system.ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPEDThe crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed Crossbar Stowed In Side Railwithin the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy thecrossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rackcrossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rackdoes not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
  • 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weighton vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load mustnot exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformlydistributed over the luggage rack crossbars.NOTE:• Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or stowed in the incorrect positions.• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the side rails when they are not in use.Deploying the Crossbars Loosening CrossbarsTo deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumbscrews at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar CAUTION!from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat withcrossbar on the opposite side. Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care tokeep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screwdown. 3 Deployed Position Then, position the crossbars across the roof. Stowed Position
  • 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars alignany two of the three deploy positions. with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the crossbars into the deployed positions. Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the Stowing the Crossbarsthumb screws completely. Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once the crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws completely. 3 Tightening Crossbar
  • 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first, CAUTION!with rail tie down loops used as additional securingpoints if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplemen- • Check deployed crossbars frequently and retightentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha- thumb screws as necessary.nisms with the tie loops. • To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri- ately. • To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars deployed. • The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof, place a blanket or other protective layer between the load and the roof surface. Rail Tie Loops (Continued)
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297 CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such Cargo must be securely tied before driving your as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the frontal area should be secured to both the front and vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per- rear of the vehicle.• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack 3 cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads and may Sun screens are available for second and third row result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle. seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
  • 298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sun Screen Retracted Sun Screen ExtendedGently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward toContinue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into thetop of the window. base sill.Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooksattached to the top of the window.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCONTENTSⅥ INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .303 ▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .304 ▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 4Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .305 ▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .306 ▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331Ⅵ ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION ▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .320 ▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 ▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 ▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . .333 ▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 ▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
  • 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . .333 Ⅵ UCONNECT௡ 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . .353 ▫ Customer-Programmable Features ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .353 (System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE forⅥ Uconnect௡ 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/ CD and MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 ▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command ▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . . .364 System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 ▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .364 ▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect௡ Phone) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ▫ Uconnect௡ (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped. . . .365Ⅵ UCONNECT௡ 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 ▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect௡ Phone) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .343 Ⅵ iPod௡/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .370 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Connecting The iPod௡ Or External USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 ▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 ▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .352
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 ▫ Controlling The iPod௡ Or External USB Device ▫ Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio . . .384 Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 ▫ Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 (If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 ▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 ▫ Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 ▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .376 ▫ Third Row Swivel Screen (If Equipped) . . . . . .392Ⅵ UCONNECT௡ MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO 4 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — ▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ VES Remote Control – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Blu-Ray Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 ▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 ▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 ▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 ▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 ▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .397 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1. . . . . .382 ▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 ▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 ▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
  • 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 ▫ Unwired௡ Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429Ⅵ STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 ▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 ▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441Ⅵ CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441Ⅵ RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .420 ▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442Ⅵ CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 ▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 41 — Air Vents 5 — Upper Glove Compartment 9 — Storage Bin 13 — Hood Release2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Lower Glove Compartment 10 — Cup Holders 14 — Dimmer Switch3 — Shift Lever 7 — Climate Controls 11 — Switch Bank 15 — Headlight Switch4 — Radio 8 — DVD – If Equipped 12 — Ignition Switch
  • 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM 4
  • 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with1. Tachometer either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signal off. If either indicator flashesThis gauge measures engine revolutions per minute at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage. 5. High Beam Indicator2. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This indicator shows that the high beam head- lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for- This indicator will illuminate when the front fog ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull lights are on. toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped 6. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information This indicator will illuminate when the park Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped lights or headlights are turned on. Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display The odom- eter display shows the total distance the vehicle has been4. Turn Signal Indicators driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the when the turn signal lever is operated. correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair Message Display Areatechnician should leave the odometer reading the same When the appropriate conditions exist, the followingas it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, odometer messages will display:then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajarbe placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajarbefore the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressuremake a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Faultservice, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault 4that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Requiredmust be reset at zero. LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low CoolantThis also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed inL/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display AreaBase Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering located in the instrument cluster.wheel) to access or reset the display. Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped” for further information.
  • 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELLoW tirE CHAngE OILWhen the appropriate condition exists, the odometer dis- Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil changeplay will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles. indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash ingASCAP the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicateIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oilfiller cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display means the engine oil change interval may fluctuatearea. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the dependent upon your personal driving style.STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off themessage. If the problem continues, the message will Unless reset, this message will continue to display eachappear the next time the vehicle is started. time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press andnoFUSE release the STEP button on the steering wheel. To resetIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Igni- the oil change indicator system (after performing thetion Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or scheduled maintenance), perform the following steps.damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-eter display area. For further information on fuses and fuselocations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3091. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do 7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Lightnot start the engine). This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignitionwithin 10 seconds. switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, itNOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system 4start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not is not functioning and that service is required. However,reset. If necessary, repeat these steps. the conventional brake system will continue to operateElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.Display — If Equipped If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be servicedThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Locktures a driver-interactive display that is located in the brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when theinstrument cluster. For further information, refer to ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”. the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
  • 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMShas tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSdetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is nottires.) operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator isAs an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When theequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuouslyone or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressureon a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a varietyoverheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311of reasons, including the installation of replacement or CAUTION! (Continued)alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check the balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with aTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that 4 CAUTION! monitors engine and automatic transmission con- trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in The TPMS has been optimized for the original the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and does not come on when turning the key from OFF to warning have been established for the tire size ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- tion or sensor damage may result when using re- Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor placement equipment that is not of the same size, fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. (Continued)
  • 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ CAUTION! Malfunction Indicator Light — If EquippedProlonged driving with the MIL on could cause The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicatordamage to the engine control system. It also could Light” in the instrument cluster will come onaffect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is when the ignition switch is turned to theflashing, severe catalytic converter damage and ON/RUN position. It should go out with thepower loss will soon occur. Immediate service is engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-required. dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC WARNING! system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several milesA malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), seeabove, can reach higher temperatures than in normal your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have theoperating conditions. This can cause a fire if you problem diagnosed and corrected.drive slowly or park over flammable substances suchas dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result NOTE:in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/others. Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC 13. Fuel Door Remindersystem will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that theThe ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of thewhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop vehicle.when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that 14. Fuel Gaugecaused the ESC activation.11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. 4Light — If Equipped 15. Air Bag Warning Light This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con- trol (ESC) is off. This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on12. Speedometer during starting, stays on, or turns on whileIndicates vehicle speed. driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
  • 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL16. Shift Lever Indicator 18. Brake Warning LightThe Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the This light monitors various brake functions,instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the including brake fluid level and parking brakeautomatic transmission. application. If the brake light turns on it mayNOTE: indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem withYou must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK. the anti-lock brake system reservoir.The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the If the light remains on when the parking brake has beenlower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on theCenter (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select (ERS) master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brakefeature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift lever to hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with theactivate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in “Start- Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brakeing And Operating” for further information. System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- WARNING!ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulicsystem. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on isindicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could havedropped below a specified level. a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake SystemNOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force 4cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, thetions. The vehicle should have service performed, and Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABSthe brake fluid level checked. Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked bysary. turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
  • 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELThe light also will turn on when the parking brake is 20. Temperature Gaugeapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates thatapplied. It does not show the degree of brake application. the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.19. Seat Belt Reminder Light The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera- ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, ifthe driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a CAUTION!chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Driving with a hot engine cooling system couldReminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge readsRefer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicleBefore Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 22. Charging System Light CAUTION! (Continued) turn the engine off immediately and call an autho- This light shows the status of the electrical charg- rized dealer for service. ing system. The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on WARNING! while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If others could be badly burned by steam or boiling the charging system light remains on, it means that the 4 coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to rized dealer. look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting System Pressure Cap paragraph. Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. 23. Oil Pressure Warning Light21. Low Fuel Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal light should turn on momentarily when the en- (7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until gine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop thefuel is added. vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
  • 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELDo not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. 25. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) LightThis light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. This light informs you of a problem with theThe engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The24. Engine Temperature Warning Light light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a This light warns of an overheated engine condi- bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the have the system checked by an authorized dealer.gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and asingle chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while theFurther overheating will cause the temperature gauge to engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when thepass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever isallowed to cool. placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and If the light remains lit with the engine running, yourstop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho-shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light ishicle. If the temperature reading does not return to flashing when the engine is running, immediate service isnormal, turn the engine off immediately and call for required and you may experience reduced performance,service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicleDo In Emergencies” for further information. may require towing.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 31926. Transmission Temperature Warning Light CAUTION! During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days, the auto- Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- matic transmission oil may become too hot. ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause When the transmission overheat warning light severe transmission damage or transmission failure.turns on, you will experience reduced vehicle perfor-mance until the automatic transmission cools down. WARNING!Once the transmission has cooled down and the light 4 If you continue operating the vehicle when theturns off, you may continue to drive normally. If the high Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-speed is maintained, the overheating will continue to nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come inoccur. contact with hot engine or exhaust components andIf the overheating continues, it may become necessary to cause a fire.stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with thetransmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off.
  • 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system conveniently allows the driver to select a(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED variety of useful information by pressing the switchesThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of thetures a driver-interactive display that is located in the following:instrument cluster. • Radio Information • Fuel Economy • Vehicle Speed • Trip Info • Tire PSI • Vehicle Info • Messages • Units • System Setup (Personal Settings) Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Turn Menu Off
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321The system allows the driver to select information by UP Buttonpressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up-wheel: ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units, System Setup) and sub-menus. DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll 4 downward through the main menus and sub-menus. SELECT Button The SELECT button allows access to informa- tion in EVIC submenus, selects some feature settings, and resets some EVIC features. The EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons EVIC prompts the driver when the SELECT button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
  • 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELBACK Button The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main Press the BACK button to scroll back to a menu. The main display area also displays Љpop upЉ previous menu or sub-menu. messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- ing or information messages. These pop up messages fallElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) into several categories:Displays • Five Second Stored MessagesThe EVIC display consists of three sections: When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of and outside temperature are displayed. the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the2. The main display area where the menus and pop up condition that activated it remains active) and can be messages are displayed. reviewed from the ЉMessagesЉ main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an ЉiЉ will be displayed in the3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom- EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this eter line. message type are ЉRight Front Turn Signal Lamp OutЉThe Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the and ЉLow Tire PressureЉ.white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in themiddle, and red telltales on the left.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323• Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displaysThis message type is displayed indefinitely or until the the following messages:condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples • Key in ignitionof this message type are ЉTurn Signal OnЉ (if a turn signalis left on) and ЉLights OnЉ (if driver leaves the vehicle). • Ignition or Accessory On• Unstored Messages Until RUN • Remote start aborted — Door ajarThese messages deal primarily with the Remote Startfeature. This message type is displayed until the ignition • Remote start aborted — Hood ajar 4is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are • Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajarЉRemote Start Aborted - Door AjarЉ and ЉPress BrakePedal and Push Button to StartЉ. • Remote start aborted — Fuel low• Five Second Unstored Messages • Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to ResetWhen the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes- • Remote start active — Key to Runsage takes control of the main display area for five secondsand then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this • Wrong Keymessage type are ЉMemory System Unavailable - Not in • Damaged KeyParkЉ and ЉAutomatic High Beams OnЉ. • Key not programmed
  • 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Vehicle Not in Park • Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start • Right Front Turn Signal Light Out• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in motion) • Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts • Park Assist Disabled moving) • Service Park Assist System• Low Tire Pressure • Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not In Park• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor- • Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed ing System” in “Starting And Operating”) when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind• Premium TPM Service Graphic Display Spot System has been turned off.• Turn Signal On • Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)• RKE Battery Low system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block-• LOW WASHER FLUID age, electronic interference, or other ЉtemporaryЉ con- ditions. When this message is displayed both outside• Oil Change Required• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic inter- Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged ference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the and the gear selected is displayed. For further informa- icon only on the side of interference as long as inter- tion on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”. ference is present. • Electronic Speed Control Ready• Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis- This light will turn on when the electronic played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) speed control is ready. For further information, system is permanently unavailable. The driver will refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn- 4 standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.” ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If this message is present see an authorized dealer. • Electronic Speed Control SETEVIC White Telltale Lights This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. For further information,This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell- refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-tales. These telltales include: standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”• Electronic Range Select (ERS) StatusThe shift lever status “5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicatingthe shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” indicate the
  • 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELEVIC Amber Telltale Lights • Windshield Washer Fluid Low IndicatorThis area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell- This light will turn on to indicate the wind-tales. These telltales include: shield washer fluid is low.• Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal EVIC Red Telltale Lights (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. Thesefuel is added. telltales include:• Loose Gascap Indicator • Door Ajar If the vehicle diagnostic system determines This light will turn on to indicate that one or that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly more doors may be ajar. installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area. Tighten • Oil Pressure Warning Lightthe fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT buttonto turn off the message. If the problem continues, the This light indicates low engine oil pressure. Themessage will appear the next time the vehicle is started. light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop theA loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chimemay also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) LightThis light does not show how much oil is in the engine. This light informs you of a problem with theThe engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The• Charging System Light light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb This light shows the status of the electrical charg- check. If the light does not come on during starting, have ing system. The light should come on when the the system checked by an authorized dealer.ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly 4as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while If a problem is detected, the light will come on while thedriving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when theelectrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever isthe charging system light remains on, it means that the placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging If the light remains lit with the engine running, yoursystem. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-rized dealer. rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light isIf jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting flashing when the engine is running, immediate service isProcedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
  • 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Engine Temperature Warning Light • Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi- This light indicates that the transmission fluid tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- temperature is running hot. This may occurproaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If thischime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further light turns on, safely pull over and stop theoverheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL andthe indicator will continuously flash and a continuous run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and CAUTION!stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually causehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to severe transmission damage or transmission failure.normal, turn the engine off immediately and call forservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for more information.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Unless reset, this message will continue to display each WARNING! time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN If you continue operating the vehicle when the position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi- release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), contact with hot engine or exhaust components and perform the following steps. cause a fire. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start the engine.) 4Oil Change Required 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three timesYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change within 10 seconds.indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when youscheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change start the engine, the oil change indicator system did notindicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent uponyour personal driving style.
  • 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELFuel EconomyPress and release the UP or DOWN button until “FuelEconomy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and pressthe SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy func-tions display in the EVIC:• Average Fuel Economy (AVG)• Distance To Empty (DTE)• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)Average Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy DisplayThis display shows the average fuel economy since the Distance To Empty (DTE)last reset. The Average Fuel Economy can be reset by This display shows the estimated distance that can befollowing the prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This esti-button. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will mated distance is determined by a weighted average ofread “zero” for two seconds. Then, the history informa- the instantaneous and average fuel economy, accordingtion will be erased, and the averaging will continue from to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be resetthe last fuel average reading before the reset. through the SELECT button.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display theloading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECTthe vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h.When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicleto a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in theuntil the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant EVIC.amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW 4 Trip InfoFUEL” message and a new DTE value will display. Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “TripMiles Per Gallon (MPG) Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECTThis display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons toform while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in highlight one of the following functions if you want toreal-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving reset it:habits in order to increase fuel economy. Trip AVehicle Speed Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the lastPress and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle reset.Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
  • 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELTrip B Tire PSIShows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tirereset. PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tireElapsed Time pressure value at each corner of the graphic.Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Unitswhen the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsedtime will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”or START position. displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (ifTo Reset A Trip Function equipped) can be changed between English and MetricReset will only occur while a resettable function is units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up orselected (highlighted). Press and hold the SELECT button down until the preferred setting is highlighted, thento clear the resettable function being displayed. press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) Messages #Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. This feature shows the number of stored warning mes-Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the sages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT buttonselections below: will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press• Coolant Temp and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more than one message to step through the remaining storedDisplays the actual coolant temperature. messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to 4• Oil Temperature the Main Menu.Displays the actual oil temperature. Compass / Temperature Display• Oil Pressure The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compassDisplays the actual oil pressure. readings and the outside temperature.• Engine HoursDisplays the number of hours of engine operation.
  • 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: The system will display the last known outside NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface andtemperature when starting the vehicle and may need to an environment free from large metallic objects such asbe driven several minutes before the updated tempera- buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the etc.displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings Manual Compass Calibrationare not updated when the vehicle is not moving. If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicatorAutomatic Compass Calibration does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put theThis compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is 1. Turn ON the ignition switch.new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC willdisplay CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may 2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setupalso calibrate the compass by completing one or more (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or then press the SELECT button.metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the 3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” isEVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. displayed in the EVIC.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3354. Press and release the SELECT button to start the NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, the EVIC. Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area compass sensor, and it may give false readings. free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally. 4Compass VarianceCompass Variance is the difference between MagneticNorth and Geographic North. To compensate for thedifferences the variance should be set for the zone wherethe vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properlyset, the compass will automatically compensate for thedifferences, and provide the most accurate compassheading. For the most accurate compass performance, thecompass must be set using the following steps. Compass Variance Map
  • 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL1. Turn the ignition switch ON. message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Setup” from the main menu. (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, then press the SELECT button. Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ЉSystem SetupЉ is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance” press the SELECT button to enter the System Setup message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the sub-menu. Press and release the UP or DOWN button to SELECT button. The last variance zone number dis- select a feature form the following choices: plays in the EVIC. Select Language4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected, according to the map. When in this display you may select one of five lan- guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit. functions and the navigation system (if equipped). PressCustomer-Programmable Features the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll(System Setup) through the language choices. Press the SELECT button to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français).Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features Then, as you continue, the information will display in thewhen the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is selected language.out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337Nav–Turn By Turn–If Equipped showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.When this feature is selected, the navigation system Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understandingutilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function androute, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destina- operating information.tion is reached. To make your selection, press and releasethe SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to Auto Unlock Doors – If Equippedthe feature showing the system has been activated or the When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the 4check-mark is removed showing the system has been vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK ordeactivated. NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. ToEnable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System – make your selection, press and release the SELECTIf Equipped button until a check-mark appears next to the featureThe Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind showing the system has been activated or the check-markthe vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE is removed showing the system has been deactivated.position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph Remote Unlock Sequence(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’sSound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keylessmake your selection, press and release the SELECT Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driverbutton until a check-mark appears next to the feature Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
  • 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELtransmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passen- Remote Start Comfort Sys. – If Equippedger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of When this feature is selected and the remote start isthe doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heatedtransmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature willappears next to the feature showing the system has been automatically turn on when the remote start is activated.activated or the check-mark is removed showing the These features will stay on through the duration ofsystem has been deactivated. remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To makeRKE Linked To Memory – If Equipped your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing theWhen this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror, system has been activated or the check-mark is removedand radio settings will return to the memory set position showing the system has been deactivated.when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. Ifthis feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror, Horn with Remote Lock – If Equippedand radio settings can only return to the memory set When this feature is selected, a short horn sound willposition using the door mounted switch. To make your occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.selection, press and release the SELECT button until a This feature may be selected with or without the Flashcheck-mark appears next to the feature showing the Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, presssystem has been activated or the check-mark is removedshowing the system has been deactivated.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap- a check-mark appears next to the feature showing thepears next to the feature showing the system has been system has been activated or the check-mark is removedactivated or the check-mark is removed showing the showing the system has been deactivated.system has been deactivated. Headlamp Off DelayHorn with Remote Start When this feature is selected, the driver can choose toWhen this feature is selected, a short horn sound will have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 secondsoccur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll 4is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the then press and release the SELECT button until a check-feature showing the system has been activated or the mark appears next to the setting, showing that the settingcheck-mark is removed showing the system has been has been selected.deactivated. Headlamps with Wipers (Available with AutoFlash Lamps with Lock Headlights Only)When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in theflash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. Thewithout the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turnedyour selection, press and release the SELECT button until
  • 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELoff if they were turned on by this feature. To make your Key-Off Power Delayselection, press and release the SELECT button until a When this feature is selected, the power windowcheck-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the switches, radio, Uconnect௡ phone (if equipped), DVDsetting has been selected. video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutescauses the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening eitherbrightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make yourFeatures Of Your Vehicle.” selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT buttonIntermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showingWhen ON is selected, the system will automatically that the setting has been selected.activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on Illuminated Approachthe windshield. To make your selection, press and releasethe SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to When this feature is selected, the headlights will activatethe feature showing the system has been activated or the and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors arecheck-mark is removed showing the system has been unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system tion, scroll up or down until the preferred setting isreverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button feature showing the system has been activated or theuntil a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing check-mark is removed showing the system has beenthat the setting has been selected. deactivated.Flashers with Sliding Door NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is setWhen this feature is selected the signal lamps activate to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock thewhen power or manual sliding doors are in operation, door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understandingsignaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or 4 The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.entering the vehicle. To make your selection, press andrelease the SELECT button until a check-mark appears Tilt Mirror In Reverse – If Equippednext to the feature showing the system has been activated When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed inor the check-mark is removed showing the system has a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downwardbeen deactivated. to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot andEasy Entry/Exit Seat – If Equipped avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to To make your selection, press and release the SELECTenhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the button until a check-mark appears next to the featurevehicle. To make your selection, press and release the showing the system has been activated or the check-markSELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
  • 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELBlind Spot Alert – If Equipped NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia isThere are three selections when operating Blind Spot not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights”, “Blind Spot Alert Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensorLights/CHM”, “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind Spot alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will resultAlert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights” in the BSM not operating to specification.mode, when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual Calibrate Compassalert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM”mode, in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will Compass Varianceshow a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “BlindSpot Alert Off” is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) Turn Menu Offsystem is deactivated. Press and release SELECT to turn the menu off.To make your selection, press and release the SELECTbutton until a check-mark appears next to the featureshowing the system has been activated or the check-markis removed showing the system has been deactivated.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343Uconnectா 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — UCONNECTா 130IF EQUIPPEDRefer to your Uconnect௡ user’s manual for detailedoperating instructions.Operating Instructions (Voice CommandSystem) — If EquippedRefer to “Voice Command” for further details. 4Operating Instructions (Uconnectா Phone) —If EquippedRefer to “Uconnect௡ Phone” for further details. Uconnect௡ 130 Operating Instructions — Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
  • 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPower Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on theradio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second TIME Buttontime to turn off the radio. Press the TIME button to alternate display of the timeElectronic Volume Control and radio frequency.The electronic volume control turns continuously Clock Setting Procedure(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turn- 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increasesthe volume, and to the left decreases it. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob.When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/set at the same volume level as last played. SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutesSEEK Buttons will begin to blink.Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con-to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio trol knob to save time change.will remain tuned to the new station until you make 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345RW/FF Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease thecauses the tuner to search for the next frequency in the treble tones.direction of the arrows. This feature operates in eitherAM or FM frequencies. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/TUNE Control SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust theTurn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise sound level from the right or left side speakers. 4to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth timeSetting the Tone, Balance, and Fade and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenwill display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the front and rear speakers.the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again toPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second exit setting tone, balance, and fade.time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease themid-range tones.
  • 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELAM/FM Button SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected bySET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton pressing the pushbutton twice.Memory Every time a preset button is used, a correspondingWhen you are receiving a station that you wish to button number will display.commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RNDbutton. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display Buttons 1 - 6window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto These buttons tune the radio to the stations that youthis station and press and release that button. If a button commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM sta-is not selected within five seconds after pressing the tions).SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but DISC Buttonwill not be stored into pushbutton memory. Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch fromYou may add a second station to each pushbutton by AM/FM modes to Disc modes.repeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in thedisplay window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radioMP3 Audio Play ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display willNOTE: show the track number, and index time in minutes and• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. to operate the radio.• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), CAUTION! recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs 4 discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and only. The use of other sized discs may damage the multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. CD player mechanism.Inserting Compact Disc(s) • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism.Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD • The Uconnect௡ 130 is a single CD player. Do notlabel facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into attempt to insert a second CD if one is alreadythe CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the loaded.radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be (Continued)ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
  • 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SEEK Button CAUTION! (Continued) • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning cause damage to the player. of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second ofEJECT Button - Ejecting a CD the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. CD and MP3 modes. TIME ButtonIf you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within Press this button to change the display from a large CD10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, playing time display to a small CD playing time display.the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. RW/FFA disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CDNOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, orconvertible or soft-top models (if equipped). RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349AM/FM Button Supported Media (Disc Types)Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)Press this button while the CD is playing to activateRandom Play. This feature plays the selections on the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660compact disc in random order to provide an interesting Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.change of pace. When reading discs recorded using formats other than 4 ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to readPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ran- files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-domly selected track. mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.Press the RND button a second time to stop Random The radio uses the following limits for file systems:Play. • Maximum number of folder levels: 8Notes on Playing MP3 FilesThe radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of files: 255file recording media and formats are limited. When • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of filewriting MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric- names and folder names is limited. For large numberstions. of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
  • 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is display.) designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: not play the file. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to character extension) an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the • Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- following table are supported. In addition, variable bit character extension) rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 orMultisession disc formats are supported by the radio. VBR bit rate.Multisession discs may contain combinations of normalCD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open afterwritingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use ofmultisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result inlonger disc loading times.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 Sampling Playback of MP3 Files MPEG Frequency Bit Rate (kbps) When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Specification (kHz) radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium MPEG-1 Audio 48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224, contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more Layer 3 192, 160, 128, time to start playing the MP3 files. 112, 96, 80, 64, Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected 56, 48, 40, 32 by the following: 4 MPEG-2 Audio 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144, Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64, • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than 56, 48, 40, 32, CD-R media 24, 16, 8 • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longerID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title to load than non-multisession discsare supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not • Number of files and folders - Loading times willsupported by the radios. increase with more files and foldersPlaylist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are notsupported.
  • 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELTo increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and theto use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio issingle-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUXbefore writing to the disc. audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which Press this button to change the display to time of day. Theallows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition isMP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s OFF).audio system to amplify the source and play through thevehicle speakers.Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode toauxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353UCONNECTா 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turn- 4 ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. Uconnect௡ 130 SEEK ButtonsOperating Instructions — Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switchACC position to operate the radio. to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
  • 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELwill remain tuned to the new station until you make Phone Button Uconnect௡ Phone — If Equippedanother selection. Holding either button will bypass Press this button to operate the Uconnect௡ Phone featurestations without stopping, until you release it. (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect௡ Phone” for furtherVoice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped details.Refer to “Voice Command” for further details. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With UconnectVoice Command Button Uconnect௡ Phone — Phone” message will display on the radio screen.If EquippedPress this button to operate the Uconnect௡ Phone feature TIME Button(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further Press the TIME button to alternate display of the timedetails. and radio frequency.If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not Clock Setting Procedureavailable on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radioscreen. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3553. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call will begin to blink. letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- RW/FF trol knob to save time change. Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the 4The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in eitherFor vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the AM or FM frequencies.SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select TUNE ControlSET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwiseradio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.procedure, starting at Step 2. Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
  • 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth timetime and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenmid-range tones. the front and rear speakers.Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again totime and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Buttontreble tones. Pressing this button once will turn on the Music TypePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE buttontime and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within fiveSCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the seconds will allow the program format type to be se-sound level from the right or left side speakers. lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16-Digit Characterformat types: Program Type Display 16-Digit Character Oldies Oldies Program Type Personality Persnlty Display No program type or None Public Public undefined Rhythm and Blues R&B Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Music Rel Musc 4 Classical Classicl Religious Talk Rel Talk Classic Rock Cls Rock Rock Rock College College Soft Soft Country Country Soft Rock Soft Rck Foreign Language Language Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B Information Inform Sports Sports Jazz Jazz Talk Talk News News Top 40 Top 40 Nostalgia Nostalga Weather Weather
  • 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELBy pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con-is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob tostation with the same selected Music Type name. The save time change.Music Type function only operates when in the FM AM/FM Buttonmode. Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbuttonexited and the radio will tune to the preset station. MemorySETUP Button When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RNDPressing the SETUP button allows you to select between button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the displaythe following items: window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow station and press and release that button. If a button is you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/ TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the RND button, the station will continue to play but will not hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set be stored into pushbutton memory. the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359You may add a second station to each pushbutton by Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD andrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Press MP3 Audio Playthe SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the NOTE:display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 andSET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACCand 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. position to operate the radio.The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),pressing the pushbutton twice. recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact 4Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks andbutton number will display. multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.Buttons 1 - 6 Inserting Compact Disc(s)These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CDto pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations). label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled intoDISC/AUX Button the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more thanPressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must befrom AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode. ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
  • 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELIf you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the CAUTION! (Continued)radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD modeand begin to play when you insert the disc. The display • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, thewill show the track number, and index time in minutes other side is a CD) should not be used, and they canand seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. cause damage to the player. EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD CAUTION! Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within away and jam the player mechanism. 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, • The Uconnect௡ 130 is a single CD player. Do not the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. attempt to insert a second CD if one is already A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. loaded. NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on (Continued) convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361SEEK Button AM/FM ButtonPress the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)of the current selection, or return to the beginning of theprevious selection if the CD is within the first second of Press this button while the CD is playing to activatethe current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK Random Play. This feature plays the selections on thebutton will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in compact disc in random order to provide an interestingCD and MP3 modes. change of pace. 4TIME Button Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran- domly selected track.Press this button to change the display from a large CDplaying time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran- dom Play.RW/FF Notes On Playing MP3 FilesPress and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player willbegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button file recording media and formats are limited. Whenworks in a similar manner. writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric- tions.
  • 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSupported Media (Disc Types) display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files,The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. WithCDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in thisSupported Medium Formats (File Systems) display.)The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-When reading discs recorded using formats other than character extension)ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- character extension)mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal• Maximum number of folder levels: 8 CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after• Maximum number of files: 255 writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times. of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363Supported MP3 File Formats Sampling MPEGThe radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- Frequency Bit Rate (kbps) Specificationsion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 (kHz)extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-1 Audio 48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will Layer 3 192, 160, 128,not play the file. 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 4an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the MPEG-2 Audio 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,following table are supported. In addition, variable bit Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files 56, 48, 40, 32,use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or 24, 16, 8VBR bit rates. ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.
  • 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPlayback of MP3 Files LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all foldersradio checks all files on the medium. If the medium on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done bycontains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting atime to start playing the MP3 files. folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or theLoading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected next folder in sequence if the selection does not containby the following: playable files).• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than The folder list will time out after five seconds. CD-R media• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) to load than non-multisession discs Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through• Number of files and folders - Loading times will the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File increase with more files and folders Name, and Folder Name (if available).To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsedto use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a timeЉ priority mode.single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” optionbefore writing to the disc.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)more and the radio will display song titles for each file. Press this button to change the display to time of day. ThePress and hold the INFO button again for three seconds time of day will display for five seconds (when theto return to Љelapsed timeЉ display. ignition is OFF).Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode Uconnectா (Satellite Radio) — If EquippedThe auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to 4MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satelliteaudio system to amplify the source and play through the Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,vehicle speakers. sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-iary device if the AUX jack is connected. NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and thedevice’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio isnot loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUXaudio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
  • 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSystem Activation To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you ESN/SID Accessmay begin listening immediately to the one year of audio With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-service that is included with the factory-installed satellite tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scrollradio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel- using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID iscome kit that contains general information, including selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and thehow to setup your on-line listening account. For further Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID numberinformation, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, display will time out in two minutes. Press any button onor visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at the radio to exit this screen.www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents. Selecting Uconnect௡ (Satellite) ModeElectronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ESN/SID) Press the SAT button until ЉSATЉ appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radioPlease have the following information available when mode.calling:1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367Satellite Antenna • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on theroof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna canplaced within the line of sight of the antenna will cause cause signal blockage.decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as Operating Instructions - Uconnect௡ (Satellite)bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Modethe loading design of the rack. Do not place items directlyon or above the antenna. NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or 4Reception Quality ACC position to operate the radio.Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the SEEK Buttonsfollowing reasons: Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will structure or under a physical obstacle. remain tuned to the new channel until you make another• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the selection. Holding either button will bypass channels form of short audio mutes. without stopping until you release it.
  • 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSCAN Button TUNE Control (Rotary)Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwisethe next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN MUSIC TYPE Buttonbutton a second time. Pressing this button once will turn on the Music TypeINFO Button mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE buttonPressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within fivetion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- seconds will allow the program format type to be se-able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an lected.additional three seconds will make the radio display the Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the musicSong Title all of the time (press and hold again to return type.to normal display). By pressing the SEEK button when the Music TypeRW/FF function is active, the radio will be tuned to the nextPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons channel with the same selected Music Type name.causes the tuner to search for the next channel in thedirection of the arrows. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369SETUP Button You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: PressPressing the SETUP button allows you to select the the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the displayfollowing items: window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton Sirius subscription. twice. 4SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory Every time a preset button is used, a correspondingWhen you are receiving a channel that you wish to button number will display.commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. Buttons 1 - 6The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. These buttons tune the radio to the channels that youSelect the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).and press and release that button. If a button is notselected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- Operating Instructions (Uconnectா Phone) —ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be If Equippedstored into pushbutton memory. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Phone” for further details.
  • 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELiPodா/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/ • If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriateREL/RET radios only with Uconnect௡. For sales code Uconnect௡ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod௡RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio or external USB device support capability.iPod௡/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate • Connecting an iPod௡ or consumer electronic audioRBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual. device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,iPod௡/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as plays media, but does not use the iPod௡ /MP3 controlan option with these radios. feature to control the connected device.This feature allows an iPod௡ or external USB device to be Connecting The iPodா Or External USB Deviceplugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart-ment. Use the connection cable to connect an iPod௡ or external USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which isiPod௡ control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod௡ located in the glove compartment.and iPhone௡ devices. Some iPod௡ software versions maynot fully support the iPod௡ control features. Please visitApple’s website for software updates.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is not available in the glove compartment, route the cable away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to close without damaging the cable. Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s iPod௡/USB/MP3 control system (iPod௡ or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by 4 pressing radio switches, as described below. NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis- charged, it may not communicate with the iPod௡/USB/ USB Connector Port MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod௡/USB/where the iPod௡ or consumer electronic audio device MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.cable can be routed through without damaging the cablewhen closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
  • 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELUsing This Feature ЉUSBЉ or ЉSwitch to USBЉ. Once in the iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audioBy using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.USB port: Play Mode• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, When switched to iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode, the etc.) information on the radio display. iPod௡ or external USB device automatically starts Play mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio• The audio device can be controlled using the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod௡ or external buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod௡ contents. USB device and display data:• The audio device battery charges when plugged into • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific previous track. audio device) • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, whileControlling The iPodா Or External USB Device playing a track, skips to the next track or press theUsing Radio Buttons VR button and say ЉNext TrackЉ.To get into the iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode and access • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button will jump to the previous track in the list or press theon the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say VR button and say ЉPrevious TrackЉ
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and to the next screen of data for that track. Once all holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press button long enough will jump to the beginning of the will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. current track. • Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and device mode to repeat the current playing track or holding the FF>> button. press the VR button and say ЉRepeat ONЉ or ЉRepeat OffЉ.• A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will 4 jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec- • Press the SCAN button to use iPod௡/USB/MP3 de- onds. vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the• Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button desired track, when it is playing the track, press the during play mode will jump to the next track in the SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the list, or press the VR button and say ЉNext or Previous << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous TrackЉ. and next tracks.• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod௡ or external USB
  • 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL device, or press the VR button and say ЉShuffle ONЉ or through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight ЉShuffle OffЉ. If the RND icon is showing on the radio delay in updating the information on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON. display may be noticeable.List Or Browse Mode • During all List modes, the iPod௡ displays all lists in “wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottomDuring Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counter-below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables clockwise) to get to the track faster.scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the • In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used asaudio device. shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod௡ or• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions external USB device. in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio • Preset 1 – Playlists device or external USB device. • Preset 2 – Artists • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise • Preset 3 – Albums (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the • Preset 4 – Genres track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be • Preset 5 – Audiobooks played is highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the • Preset 6 – Podcasts track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 • Pressing a PRESET button will display the current CAUTION! list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line. • Leaving the iPod௡ or external USB device (or any • To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex- same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode. treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam- age the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top guidelines. level menu of the iPod௡ or external USB device. Turn • Placing items on the iPod௡ or external USB device, 4 the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be or connections to the iPod௡ or external USB device selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device display the next sub-menu list item on the audio and/or to the connectors. device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod௡ or external USB device sub-menu levels are available on this system. WARNING!• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is Do not plug in or remove the iPod௡ or external USB another shortcut button to the genre listing on your device while driving. Failure to follow this warning audio device. could result in an accident.
  • 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELBluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) Selecting Different Audio DeviceMusic can be streamed from your cellular phone to the 1. Press PHONE button to begin.Uconnect௡ phone system. 2. After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, sayControlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons ЉSetupЉ, then ЉSelect Audio DevicesЉ.To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on 3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect௡the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth phone system to list audio devices.Streaming Audio”. Next TrackPlay Mode Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on theWhen switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next trackstart playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but music on your cellular phone.some devices require the music to be initiated on thedevice first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect௡ Previous Trackphone system. Seven devices can be paired to the Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button onUconnect௡ phone system, but just one can be selected the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to theand played. previous track music on your cellular phone.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377BrowseBrowsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only thecurrent song that is playing will display info.UCONNECTா MULTIMEDIA — VIDEOENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ —If EquippedGetting Started 4• Screen(s) located in the overhead console: Unfold the overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the overhead console behind the screen(s). Video Entertainment System (VES)™ • Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position. • Your vehicle may be equipped with either a standard DVD player or a Blu-Ray Disc Player. If equipped with a Blu-Ray Disc Player, the icon will be present on the Player.
  • 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Turn on the Player (if equipped on Dual Screen Sys- Blu-Ray Player tem) by pushing the Power button, located on the far Play A Blu-Ray Disc left, or by pressing the button on the Remote Control. To view a Blu-Ray insert the disc into the Blu-Ray VES™• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD is disc Player. Playback will begin automatically after the inserted into the VES™ player, the screen(s) turn(s) on Blu-Ray is recognized by the disc drive. If playback does automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into the playback begins. Blu-Ray player press the play button. If playback does• For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1 Blu-Ray VES™ disc Player follow these steps: (second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control Using the Touch-Screen Radio and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to the Dual Video Screen section for more information. • Press the MENU hard-key, then touch the Rear VES™ soft key. If a chapter list appears on the right side of the• The system can be controlled by the front seat occu- screen, touch the hide list soft key to display the Rear pants using either the touch-screen- radio, the DVD or VES™ control screen. Blu-Ray Disc Player, or by the rear seat occupants using the remote control. • Touch the 1 soft-key to select an audio channel, then touch the VES™ Disc soft-key in the media column.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379Using the Remote Control• Select an audio channel (Channel 1 for 2nd row screen and Channel 2 for 3rd row screen), then press the source key and select VES™ Disc from the menu.• Press popup/menu key to navigate disc menu and options.Play Video Games 4Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCAinput jacks (1 set or 2 depending on vehicle) located onthe back of the center console or on left side behind thesecond row seat. 1. Video In – Yellow 2. Left Audio In – White 3. Right Audio In – Red 4. AUX 2 Inputs (If Equipped) 5. Power Outlet